null  null
HELIX G2 and HELIX G2N Series
Operations Manual
532509-2EN_A
THANK YOU!
Thank you for choosing Humminbird®, the #1 name in marine electronics. Humminbird has built its reputation by designing and
manufacturing top quality, thoroughly reliable marine equipment. Your Humminbird is designed for trouble-free use in even the
harshest marine environment. We encourage you to read this manual carefully in order to get the full benefit from all the features
and applications of your Humminbird product.
Contact Humminbird Customer Service at humminbird.com or call 1-800-633-1468.
NOTE: Some features discussed in this manual require a
separate purchase, and some features are only available on
international models. Every effort has been made to clearly
identify those features. Please read the manual carefully in
order to understand the full capabilities of your model.
WARNING! This product contains chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
WARNING! This device should not be used as a navigational aid
to prevent collision, grounding, boat damage, or personal injury.
When the boat is moving, water depth may change too quickly to
allow time for you to react. Always operate the boat at very slow
speeds if you suspect shallow water or submerged objects.
NOTE: The illustrations in this manual may not look the same as
your product, but your unit will function in a similar way.
NOTE: To purchase accessories for your control head, visit our
Web site at humminbird.com or contact Humminbird Customer
Service at 1-800-633-1468.
WARNING! The electronic chart in your Humminbird unit is an
aid to navigation designed to facilitate the use of authorized
government charts, not to replace them. Only official
government charts and notices to mariners contain all of the
current information needed for the safety of navigation, and the
captain is responsible for their prudent use.
NOTE: The procedures and features described in this manual are
subject to change without notice. This manual was written in
English and may have been translated to another language.
Humminbird is not responsible for incorrect translations or
discrepancies between documents.
WARNING! Humminbird is not responsible for the loss of data
files (waypoints, routes, tracks, groups, recordings, etc.) that
may occur due to direct or indirect damage to the unit’s
hardware or software. It is important to back up your control
head’s data files periodically. Data files should also be saved to
your PC before restoring the control head defaults or updating
the software. See the following sections of your Humminbird
manual: Manage Screen Snapshots and Recordings and
Manage your Navigation Data: Import/Export Navigation Data.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change
without notice.
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater
conditions, however actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom
composition, and slope.
ROHS STATEMENT: Product designed and intended as a fixed
installation or part of a system in a vessel may be considered beyond
the scope of Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of
the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain
hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
WARNING! Disassembly and repair of this electronic unit should
only be performed by authorized service personnel. Any
modification of the serial number or attempt to repair the original
equipment or accessories by unauthorized individuals will void the
warranty.
WARNING! Do NOT leave the control head microSD or SD card
slot cover open. The slot cover should always be closed to
prevent water damage to the unit.
ATTENTION INTERNATIONAL CUSTOMERS: Products sold in the U.S.
are not intended for use in the international market. Humminbird
international units provide international features and are designed
to meet country and regional regulations. Languages, maps, time
zones, units of measurement, and warranty are examples of
features that are customized for Humminbird international units
purchased through our authorized international distributors.
WARNING! Do not travel at high speed with the unit cover
installed on the HELIX 5 or HELIX 7 control head. Remove the
unit cover before traveling at speeds above 20 mph.
To obtain a list of authorized international distributors, please visit
our Web site at humminbird.com or contact Humminbird Customer
Service at (334) 687-6613.
2
FCC NOTICE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION! This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Class B Device (Broadcasting and communication equipment for home):
CAUTION! This equipment is home use (Class B) electromagnetic wave suitability equipment and to be used at home and it can be used in
all areas.
ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE STATEMENT: It is the intention of Johnson Outdoors Marine Electronics, Inc. to be a responsible corporate citizen,
operating in compliance with known and applicable environmental regulations, and a good neighbor in the communities where we make or sell
our products.
WEEE DIRECTIVE: EU Directive 2002/96/EC “Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive (WEEE)” impacts most distributors, sellers,
and manufacturers of consumer electronics in the European Union. The WEEE Directive requires the producer of consumer electronics to take
responsibility for the management of waste from their products to achieve environmentally responsible disposal during the product life cycle.
WEEE compliance may not be required in your location for electrical & electronic equipment (EEE), nor may it be required for EEE designed and
intended as fixed or temporary installation in transportation vehicles such as automobiles, aircraft, and boats. In some European Union member
states, these vehicles are considered outside of the scope of the Directive, and EEE for those applications can be considered excluded from the
WEEE Directive requirement.
This symbol (WEEE wheelie bin) on product indicates the product must not be disposed of with other household refuse. It must be disposed
of and collected for recycling and recovery of waste EEE. Johnson Outdoors Marine Electronics, Inc. will mark all EEE products in accordance
with the WEEE Directive. It is our goal to comply in the collection, treatment, recovery, and environmentally sound disposal of those
products; however, these requirements do vary within European Union member states. For more information about where you should
dispose of your waste equipment for recycling and recovery and/or your European Union member state requirements, please contact your dealer
or distributor from which your product was purchased.
360 Imaging®, AUTOCHART®, AUTOCHART® LIVE, ChartSelect®, Contour XD™, Down Imaging®, DualBeam PLUS™, Fish ID+™, FishSmart™, HELIX®, Humminbird®,
HumminbirdPC™, LakeMaster®, MEGA Down Imaging™, MEGA Imaging™, MEGA Side Imaging™, Real Time Sonar™, RTS™, RTS Window™, Side Imaging®, SI™, Structure
ID™, SwitchFire®, UniMap™, WhiteLine™, X-Press™ Menu, are trademarked by or registered trademarks of Johnson Outdoors Marine Electronics, Inc.
Adobe, Acrobat, Adobe PDF, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Baekmuk Batang, Baekmuk Dotum, Baekmuk Gulim, and Baekmuk Headline are registered trademarks owned by Kim Jeong-Hwan.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Johnson Outdoors, Inc. is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
microSD and SD are trademarks or registered trademarks of SD-3C, LLC in the United States, other countries or both.
Navionics® Gold, HotMaps™, and HotMaps™ Premium, Navionics® Classic Charts, Navionics+™, and Platinum™ Cartography are trademarked by or registered trademarks
of Navionics S.p.A.
© 2016 Johnson Outdoors Marine Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Warnings
2
Display a Down Imaging View On-Screen
85
Introduction
7
Using Humminbird Manuals on your Mobile Device or PC
8
Adjust Settings While you Fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Getting Started
10
Review Down Imaging History and Zoom In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
HELIX Control Head
19
Menu System Overview
24
Understand the Down Imaging View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Customize the Down Imaging View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Navigation in Down Imaging Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Display a Side Imaging View On-Screen
100
Understand the Side Imaging View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Open an X-Press Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Customize the Side Imaging View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Open the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Adjust Settings While you Fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Select a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Review Side Imaging History and Zoom In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Change a Menu Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Navigation in Side Imaging Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Tips for Using the Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Manage Screen Snapshots and Recordings
119
Chart Overview
127
Change the User Mode (Normal or Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Close the Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Display a Chart View On-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Views
28
Select a Map Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Display a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Customize the Bird’s Eye View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Show your Favorite Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Customize the Chart Instrument View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Save a View to the VIEW SHORTCUT Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Customize the Chart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Display Digital Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Display Humminbird LakeMaster
Combo Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Sonar Overview (Sonar, DI, SI, CHIRP)
35
Set up Sonar (Sonar, DI, SI, CHIRP)
38
Contour Lines and Depth Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Change the Chart Orientation and Motion Mode . . . . . . . . . . .143
Navigation Overview
145
Navigation Alarms Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Display a Sonar View On-Screen
50
Man Overboard (MOB) Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Understand the Sonar Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Waypoints
150
Adjust Sonar Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Routes
159
Adjust Settings While you Fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Tracks
164
Search
167
Manage your Navigation Data
169
Customize the Sonar View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Compare Sonar Beams (Split Sonar View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Review Sonar History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Zoom In/Zoom Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Manage Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Navigation in Sonar Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Manage Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Display the Circular Flasher View On-Screen
76
Manage Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Understand the Circular Flasher View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Manage Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Adjust Settings While you Fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Search and Organize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Move the Depth Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Import/Export Navigation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Zoom In/Out in Circular Flasher View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Delete All Navigation Data and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
AutoChart Live Overview
192
Plan your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Prepare the Control Head for Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Record your Custom Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Stop Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Correct Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Open the AutoChart Live Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Display the AutoChart Live Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Customize the AutoChart Live Map Display Settings . . . . . . .200
Customize the Bottom Hardness Display Settings . . . . . . . . .205
Customize the Vegetation Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Manage your Control Head
213
Update Software
218
Maintenance
219
Troubleshooting
220
Specifications
222
Contact Humminbird
259
5
6
INTRODUCTION
The instructions in this manual describe the HELIX 5, 7, 9, 10, 12 G2 Series and G2N Series control head operations. Review the
following table to understand the features that apply to your control head.
Model
Sonar
(2D)
Down
Imaging
Side
Imaging
CHIRP
Ethernet
(optional)
GPS
(Charts and Navigation)
HELIX GPS G2
HELIX SONAR G2
External GPS, trackplotting
(separate purchase required)
HELIX DI G2
External GPS, trackplotting
(separate purchase required)
HELIX CHIRP DI G2
External GPS, trackplotting
(separate purchase required)
HELIX CHIRP GPS G2/G2N
G2N
models only
HELIX CHIRP DI GPS G2/G2N
G2N
models only
HELIX CHIRP SI GPS G2/G2N
G2N
models only
HELIX CHIRP MEGA SI GPS G2N
MEGA
MEGA
Operations Summary Guide: For an overview of functions, see the Operations Summary Guide included with your product.
Accessories: Some of the features shown in this manual require a separate purchase. Radar, AIS, Compass/Heading Sensor,
Ethernet, i-Pilot Link, etc. require a separate purchase. For the list of accessories that are compatible with your control head, visit
our Web site at humminbird.com. To install each accessory, use the installation guide provided with it, or download the guide from
our Web site.
Ethernet Models: Visit our Web site at humminbird.com to purchase Ethernet cables and switches, and to download the Ethernet
Networking Installation and Operations Manual.
Register and Update: It is important to register your products and keep your software up to date. Visit our Web site at
humminbird.com to set up an account, update control head and accessory software, and purchase additional equipment. Also, see
Update Software in this manual for more information.
NOTE: The illustrations in this manual may not look the same as your product, but your unit will function in a similar way.
7
Introduction
USING HUMMINBIRD MANUALS ON YOUR MOBILE DEVICE OR PC
The Humminbird manuals for your control head and accessories can be downloaded to your mobile device or PC. If you prefer to use
a hard copy for reference, this manual may be printed.
Download the Manual to your Mobile Device
1. Download the free Adobe Acrobat Reader app to your mobile device.
2. Go to our Web site at humminbird.com, and click Support > Product Manuals.
3. Select the PDF for your control head model or accessory, and save it to your device.
4. Open the Adobe Acrobat Reader app.
5. Open the Humminbird manual.
Download the Manual to your PC
1. Download the free Adobe Acrobat Reader software from http://get.adobe.com/reader/, and install it on your PC.
2. Go to our Web site at humminbird.com, and click Support > Product Manuals.
3. Select the PDF for your control head model or accessory, and save it to your device.
4. Open Adobe Acrobat Reader.
5. Open the Humminbird manual.
Jump to a Section: Click a section name in the Bookmarks panel. Bookmarks can be expanded and collapsed by clicking on
the plus (+) or minus (-) icons.
Search for Words or Phrases: Press and hold the Ctrl F keys on your PC keyboard. Type the word(s) into the text box.
Print: If you prefer to use a hard copy for reference, this manual may be printed.
Introduction
8
Using the Manual
search for
key words
bookmarks
panel
(Ctrl + F)
9
Introduction
GETTING STARTED
The procedures in this section describe how to get started with your control head. Some of the settings in this section are a onetime set up, and other settings (such as checking the GPS reception) you will use each time you hit the water.
Power On
Follow the instructions below to power on your Humminbird control head.
1. Press the
POWER key.
2. When the Title screen is displayed, press the MENU key.
Title Screen
Press the MENU key
3. Select Normal. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Getting Started
10
Normal
Normal mode is required for on-the-water operation. If a functioning transducer is connected
to the control head, Normal will be selected automatically, and your control head can be used
on the water.
Simulator
To learn how to use your control head, select Simulator. You can save menu settings and
navigation data in Simulator mode (see Chart Overview and Navigation Overview for more
information).
System Status
To view system information for software version, GPS reception, and accessory connections,
select System Status. See Check Accessory Connections and Check GPS Reception for more
information.
NOTE: If you wait too long to select a start-up option, the system will start the mode that is already highlighted. If your control head
goes into Demonstration mode, please note that menu settings cannot be saved in this mode (see Manage your Control Head).
Starting Normal Mode for on-the-water Operations
Press the
RIGHT Cursor key
11
Getting Started
Quick Setup
If this is the first time the unit has been powered on (after installation or after restoring defaults), the Quick Setup menu will display.
Quick Setup Menu
Set up the Control Head
1. Use the Cursor Control key to change the settings.
2. Close: Press the EXIT key.
The available languages are determined by your Humminbird model.
Language
Max Depth
WARNING! Do NOT enable Asian Mode if you do not require Asian languages. Before you select
Asian Mode, contact Customer Service for important information.
Set the maximum depth of the body of water. When Max Depth is set to Auto, the control head
will acquire bottom readings as needed (within the capabilities of the unit). When Max Depth
is set to match your water maximum depth, the control head will not attempt to acquire sonar
data below that depth, so more detail will be shown on the display.
Side Imaging units default to the Side Imaging range setting if the SI Range is set deeper than
the Max Depth. See the Side Imaging section for more information.
Water Type affects the accuracy of deep water depth readings and configures the control head
for operation in fresh or salt water.
Water Type
In salt water, you can also choose the shallow or deep setting. If the depth is more than 330 ft
(100 m), select Salt (deep).
Connected
Transducer
The control head will automatically select the transducer that was included with your control
head. If your model is compatible with an accessory transducer, and it is connected to the
control head, select the transducer in the system so the beams are activated and the related
views are added to the control head.
NOTE: To change the Max Depth, Water Type, and the Connected Transducer after the initial Setup, see Set up Sonar.
Getting Started
12
Check Accessory Connections
If you’ve connected other separate-purchase equipment to the control head, such as AIS, Compass/Heading Sensor, and more,
use these instructions to confirm the equipment is detected and communicating with the control head. You can also check Ethernet
accessory connections from this view.
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select System > Accessory Test.
Confirm all accessories are listed as Connected. If you have a temp/speed wheel, the wheel must move for it to be detected.
Unconnected: If an accessory is listed as Unconnected, check the cable and power connections to confirm they are secure and
powered on. Review the installation guide that was included with your accessory to confirm it is installed correctly.
Confirming Accessories are Detected (HELIX 9 CHIRP SI GPS G2N)
unconnected
(not detected
by the control
head)
connected
NOTE: The menus for installed accessories are typically included in the Accessory tab in the Main Menu. See your accessory guide
for details. For the latest list of accessories that are compatible with your control head, visit our Web site at humminbird.com.
13
Getting Started
Check GPS Reception
If your control head includes internal GPS, or if it is connected to an External GPS receiver, use the instructions in this section to
confirm the control head has GPS reception.
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select System > GPS Diagnostic View.
Confirm GPS Fix Type is shown as Enhanced or 3D.
Confirm that the latitude/longitude position readout is displayed.
Reviewing GPS Reception
active satellite signal strength (yellow)
monitored satellite
signal strength
(gray)
fix type shown as
enhanced
latitude/longitude
position
GPS Reception: The sky chart displays the satellite number and signal strength bar.
GPS Fix Type: reported as No Fix, 2D Fix, 3D Fix, or Enhanced. An Enhanced Fix has been augmented using information from
WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS.
HDOP (the Horizontal Dilution of Precision): a GPS system parameter which depends on the current satellite configuration.
HDOP is used to calculate the Estimated Position Error.
NOTE: To manually change your GPS source, change the output frequency, or turn on GLONASS, see Manage your Control Head.
Getting Started
14
Set Alarms
When an alarm is turned on, an alert will sound or display on the control head to indicate the threshold has been exceeded.
Turn on Alarms and Adjust Settings
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice.
OR
To open the Main Menu from a System View, press the MENU key once.
2. Select the Alarms tab.
3. Select an alarm menu. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the threshold.
Depth Alarm
The alarm will be triggered when the depth becomes equal to or less than the menu setting.
Transducer required.
Fish ID Alarm
The alarm will be triggered when a fish is detected based on the menu setting. See Adjust Sonar
Display Settings for more information.
Low Battery Alarm
The alarm will be triggered when the input battery voltage is equal to or less than the menu
setting. The battery must be connected to the control head. Set the alarm to a level that will
alert you when the battery is low but at a level that is high enough to start the engine and run
essential electronics. See your control head installation guide for more information.
Temp. Alarm
The alarm will be triggered when the water temperature detected by the control head is equal
to the temp alarm setting. Input from the built-in transducer temperature sensor or a
temperature accessory is required.
Off Course Alarm
Sets how far the boat can move off course during navigation before an alarm will be triggered.
GPS required. See Navigation Overview for more information.
Arrival Alarm
Sets how close the boat must be to the destination waypoint before the alarm will be triggered.
GPS required. See Navigation Overview for more information.
Drift Alarm
Sets how far the boat can move from its anchored position outside the drift alarm perimeter
before an alarm will be triggered. GPS required. See Navigation Overview for more information.
NOTE: The available alarms are determined by the connected equipment, so your control head may provide more or less options
than the information shown here. If there are accessories installed, review the accessory guide for alarm information.
4. Close: Press the EXIT key twice.
Exit an Alarm
If an alarm is triggered during control head operation, you can close it or silence it using these instructions.
1. Press any key on the control head.
15
Getting Started
Change Units of Measurement
Use the instructions in this section to change the units of measurement format. You can also change the time and date format,
language, and installation offsets from this menu. See Manage your Control Head for more information.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Select Units - Depth, Units - Distance, etc., and select each unit setting as needed.
4. Close: Press the EXIT key.
Reset the Triplog
The Triplog includes the timer for elapsed time, distance traveled since last reset, and average speed. Use the following instructions
to reset the triplog. To display the Triplog as a digital readout, see Views: Display Digital Readouts.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Select Triplog Reset.
4. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
5. Follow the on-screen prompts.
Turn on/off Sounds
Use the instructions in this section to choose the category of sounds you want to hear from your control head.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Select Sound Control.
4. Select All Sounds or Alarms only.
To receive a sound alert from an alarm, Sound Control must be set to All Sounds or Alarms Only.
Change the Alarm Tone: Select the Alarms tab > Alarm Tone.
Change the User Mode
The User Mode determines how many menu options are displayed in the menu system. Select Normal to see fewer menu options
that are used more often. Select Advanced to see all the menu options available in the menu system.
Instructions in this manual marked with Main Menu (Advanced User Mode) indicate that the menu system User Mode must be set
to Advanced for the selected menu to be shown. If you do not see the menu in the system, change the User Mode to Advanced. See
Menu System Overview for details.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Select User Mode.
4. Select Normal or Advanced.
Set up Sonar
If you’ve installed an accessory transducer, or to refine your sonar settings, see Set up Sonar for details.
Getting Started
16
Set up Chart Preferences
If you’ve installed a microSD or SD map card, see Chart Overview to set up the map source.
Pair a Phone with the Control Head (HELIX G2N Series only)
If you have a HELIX G2N Series control head, you can pair a phone with it using Bluetooth wireless technology.
Pair a Phone with the Control Head
1. Main Menu: On the HELIX control head, press the MENU key twice.
2. Open the Phone Bluetooth Menu: Select the Accessories tab.
Select Phone Bluetooth. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select On.
5. Select Connect New Phone. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
It will take a moment for this option to appear in the menu.
6. Follow the on-screen prompts to start the pairing process.
If the phone is not found, select Search for Phone. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
7. When the phone name displays in the menu, select it. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
8. Check your phone. When prompted, tap Pair on your phone.
9. In your phone Settings menu, turn on Show Notifications.
Change the Phone Bluetooth Alert Format
Use the following instructions to select an alert format on the control head or turn off alerts.
1. On the HELIX control head, open the Phone Bluetooth menu.
NOTE: In your phone Settings menu, confirm that Bluetooth is turned on and Show Notifications is turned on.
2. Select Text Message Alerts or Phone Call Alerts.
Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select an alert format. To turn off notifications, select off.
3. Select Sounds. Select On or Off.
Review Phone Bluetooth Notifications
Use the Views X-Press Menu to review notifications.
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
Reviewing Phone Bluetooth Information
text
notifications
call
phone battery
phone carrier
notifications power percentage signal strength
17
Getting Started
Adjust the Backlight
1. Press the POWER key.
2. Select Light.
3. Adjust the Backlight setting from Dim to 10 (brightest).
Start Standby Mode
To conserve power while the control head is not in-use, start Standby mode.
1. Press the POWER key.
2. Select Standby.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Turn off: Press the POWER key.
Power Off
Use the following instructions to power off your control head. You should save the current track before powering off, and your control
head should always be turned off using the POWER key.
Save the Current Track
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Save Current Track.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Power Off
1. Press and hold the POWER key.
Getting Started
18
HELIX CONTROL HEAD
HELIX 5 SONAR G2, HELIX 5 DI G2
VIEW
MENU
EXIT
HELIX 7 SONAR G2, HELIX 7 CHIRP DI G2
19
The Control Head
HELIX 7 G2/G2N Series Models (with Internal GPS)
HELIX 9, 10, 12 G2N Series
The Control Head
20
MARK KEY
Control Head Keys
The available keys are determined by your control head model.
Your control head might not include all the keys shown in this
section.
Press the MARK key to save a waypoint at the boat
position. If the cursor is active, press the MARK key
twice to save a waypoint at the cursor position. See
Navigation Overview for details.
ZOOM IN (+)/ZOOM OUT (–) KEYS
If a microSD or SD card is installed, press and hold
this key to save a Screen Snapshot. See Manage
Screen Snapshots and Recordings for details.
Press the ZOOM keys to change the scale of the view.
For a closer view, press the ZOOM IN (+) key. For a
wider view, press the ZOOM OUT (-) key. You can also
magnify the cursor selection. You can also press
these keys to adjust the sensitivity in sonar views
(Sonar, DI, SI).
MENU KEY
To open the X-Press Menu for the on-screen view and
operation mode, press the MENU key once. To open
the Main Menu, press the MENU key twice. See Menu
System Overview for details.
VIEW KEY
Press and hold the VIEW key to open the Views
X-Press menu, or press the VIEW key repeatedly until
the view you want to use is displayed on the screen.
Press the EXIT key to display the previous view. See
Views for details.
GO TO/MAN OVERBOARD (MOB) KEY
With an active cursor, press the GOTO key twice to
create a waypoint and start navigation towards that
waypoint. If the cursor is not active, press the GOTO
key, and choose from the saved navigation data.
CHECK/INFO KEY
In the Chart View, press the CHECK/INFO key to see
information about the cursor position or about
objects located near the cursor position. If the cursor
is not active, the Chart Info submenu will open. See
Navigation Overview for details.
To start Man Overboard navigation, press and hold the
GOTO key. See Navigation Overview and Man
Overboard (MOB) Navigation for details.
In Sonar Views, press this key once to switch
frequencies (if available). See each sonar section
(Sonar, DI, SI) for details.
Press the EXIT key to close a menu, close a dialog box,
turn off an alarm, or exit Cursor mode.
EXIT KEY
Also, press the EXIT key to scroll through the View
Rotation in reverse order. See Views for details.
CURSOR CONTROL KEY
(LEFT, RIGHT, UP, or DOWN Cursor keys)
VIEW SHORTCUT KEY
Press the arrows on the Cursor Control key
to move through the menu system, select
menus, and change or activate menu
settings. See Menu System Overview for
details.
Press and hold a VIEW SHORTCUT key to save a
shortcut to the on-screen view. You can save one view
on each VIEW SHORTCUT key. See Views for details.
POWER KEY
Also, press any arrow on the Cursor Control
key to move the cursor on the view.
Press the POWER key to power on the control head.
To power off, press and hold the POWER key.
To move the cursor diagonally, press in
between the arrows.
During operation, press the POWER key. The backlight
can be adjusted from this menu. You can also turn
on/off Sonar, change the view background color, and
start Standby mode.
21
The Control Head
SD Card or microSD Card Slot
Your control head may be compatible with an SD or microSD card (separate purchase required). Use it to update software, add
detailed charts to your control head, import/export navigation data, and save sonar recordings and screen snapshots. Use the
instructions in this section to install the card.
Add Maps: see Chart Overview.
Import/Export Navigation data: See Manage your Navigation Data.
Sonar Recordings and Screen Snapshots: See Manage Screen Snapshots and Recordings.
Software Updates: For details, see Update Software.
CAUTION! Before the control head software is updated or restored to system defaults, export your navigation data (see Update
Software).
Insert an SD Card
The HELIX 9, HELIX 10, and HELIX 12 control heads are compatible with SD cards.
1. Remove the SD card slot cover.
2. Position the SD card so that the label faces to the left.
3. Insert the card into the slot until it clicks into place.
4. Replace the slot cover so it is secure.
5. Remove: Press the card into the slot and then release it. The card will eject. Pull the card
carefully from the slot.
NOTE: Do not leave the SD card slot cover open. The slot cover should always be closed to
prevent water damage to the unit.
Insert the SD card with the
label facing to the left
(HELIX 9, 10, 12)
Insert a microSD Card
The HELIX 5 and HELIX 7 control heads with internal GPS are compatible with microSD cards.
1. Remove the microSD card slot cover.
2. Position the microSD card so that the label faces the front of the control head and the card notches face down.
3. Insert the card into the slot until it clicks into place.
4. Replace the slot cover so it is secure.
5. To Remove: Press the card into the slot and then release it. The card will eject. Pull the card carefully from the slot.
NOTE: Do not leave the card slot cover open. The slot cover should always be closed to prevent water damage to the unit.
The Control Head
22
Removing the microSD Card Slot Cover (HELIX 5, HELIX 7)
Installing a microSD Card (magnified view)
(HELIX 5, HELIX 7)
notch facing down
23
The Control Head
MENU SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The menu system provides menu options that are determined by the operations mode, on-screen view, and connected accessories.
Open an X-Press Menu
The X-Press Menu displays menus that are related to the on-screen view and the operations mode (such as navigation). In this
illustration, the Sonar X-Press Menu is displayed because the Sonar View is displayed on the screen.
Open the X-Press Menu
Opening the Sonar X-Press Menu
1. Press the VIEW key repeatedly until the view you want
is displayed on-screen.
2. Press the MENU key once.
x1
x1
Open the Main Menu
The main menu is divided into tabbed categories (Alarms, Sonar,
Navigation, Chart, Humminbird Chart, Setup, Views, and Accessories).
The available tabs and menus are determined by your model and the
connected accessories.
Open the Main Menu
1. Press the MENU key twice.
Menu System Overview
24
Opening the Main Menu
Select a Menu
Use the Cursor Control key to select a menu in the Main Menu or X-Press Menu.
Select a Tab (Main Menu)
Select a Menu
1. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys.
1. Press the DOWN or UP Cursor keys.
Select a Tab
Select a Menu
Change a Menu Setting
Use the Cursor Control key to change menu settings or start an action. When you change a menu setting, the view will update immediately.
Change a Menu Setting
Adjust a Menu Setting
1. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys.
25
Menu System Overview
Start an Action or Open a Submenu
Start an Action/Open a Submenu
1. If a menu has a right arrow on it, press the RIGHT Cursor key to start the
action or open the submenu.
Tips for Using the Menu System
You can move through the menu system quickly using the following tips.
Jump to the Bottom of the Tab
Jump to the Top of the Tab
See More Menus
Menu System Overview
26
Change the User Mode (Normal or Advanced)
The User Mode determines how many menus are shown in the menu system. Select Normal to see fewer menus that are used more
often. Select Advanced to see all the menus available in the menu system.
Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Instructions in this manual marked with Main Menu (Advanced User Mode) indicate that the
menu system User Mode must be set to Advanced for the selected menu to be shown. If you do not see the menu in the system,
change the User Mode to Advanced.
Change the User Mode
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Select User Mode.
4. Select Normal or Advanced.
Main Menu: Sonar Tab
(User Mode set to Normal)
Main Menu: Sonar Tab
(User Mode set to Advanced)
Close the Menu System
Use the EXIT key to go back through the menu system or close the menu system.
Back: Press the EXIT key to close the current menu and go back one level in the menu system.
Close: Press the EXIT key repeatedly until the menu system is closed.
27
Menu System Overview
VIEWS
The HELIX control head has many options to display data on-screen, and the data can be displayed in a variety of ways. There are
also several ways to quickly display a view on-screen. To see the list of views available on your control head, see Show your Favorite
Views.
Display a View
The available views are determined by the control head model, installed transducer, and connected accessories.
Display a View from the Views X-Press Menu
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select a view category. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select a view. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Selecting a View to Display on the Screen
OR
Press and Hold to Open
the Views X-Press Menu
Views
OR
Forward: Press to go
to the Next View
Back: Press to go to
the Previous View
28
Press to Display
a Saved View
Display the Next/Previous View
Next View: Press the VIEW key repeatedly until the view you want is displayed on-screen.
Previous View: Press the EXIT key repeatedly until the view you want is displayed on-screen.
Display a Saved View
1. Press a VIEW SHORTCUT key.
You can save one view on each VIEW SHORTCUT key. See Save a View to a VIEW SHORTCUT key for more information.
Show your Favorite Views
You can display or hide any view so that each time you press the VIEW key, only your favorite views are displayed on the screen. You
can also use the Views tab to see the list of views available on your control head. The available views are determined by your control
head model, installed transducer, and connected accessories.
Main Menu: Views Tab
Show/Hide a View
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice.
2. Select the Views tab.
3. Select a view.
4. Select Hidden or Visible.
Hide Sonar Views
If you’re using your control head for GPS/Navigation functions only, use these
instructions to hide all sonar views from the view rotation. This setting also
deactivates sonar.
1. Press the POWER key.
2. Select Sonar.
3. Select Off.
NOTE: You can also turn on/off Sonar from the Main Menu > Setup tab > Sonar.
Save a View to a VIEW SHORTCUT key (HELIX 9, 10, 12 only)
Another way to display your favorite views quickly is to save them on the VIEW SHORTCUT keys. You can program the VIEW SHORTCUT
keys to display a saved view immediately. You can save one view on each key.
With the view you want to save displayed on-screen, press and hold one of the VIEW SHORTCUT keys for several seconds.
29
Views
Display Digital Readouts
Digital Readout data can be displayed as an overlay, or it can be displayed in data boxes on the views. You can also choose which
digital readouts you want to display. The format and readouts you choose will be applied to all views.
Accessories: The available digital readouts are determined by the installed equipment, so if you connect accessories, additional
readouts will be available.
Format: You can change the digital readout format from the Setup Tab. See Manage your Control Head: Change Digital Readout
Formats for details.
Select the Digital Readout Type
Use the instructions in this section to display digital readouts in boxes or as overlays. You can also choose to hide the digital readouts
completely.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select Digital Readouts.
3. Select one of the following options:
Boxes
Digital Readouts are displayed in boxes on the view. See the illustration Digital Readouts with
Boxes Selected. You can customize which digital readouts are displayed (see Customize
Digital Readouts).
Overlay
The digital readouts are displayed as an overlay on the view. See the illustrations Digital
Readouts with Overlay Selected. These digital readouts are fixed and cannot be changed.
Off
The digital readouts will be hidden completely. To hide individual digital readouts instead of all,
see Customize Digital Readouts.
Show/Hide Digital Readouts on the Side Imaging View
If you have Digital Readouts set to Boxes on all views, you can hide the digital readout boxes on the Side Imaging View exclusively.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select SI Readouts.
3. Select On (show) or Off (hide).
Views
30
Digital Readouts with Overlay Selected (Sonar View)
speed
temperature
depth
Digital Readouts with Overlay Selected (Chart View)
depth
speed
temperature
31
Views
Customize Digital Readouts
If you have Digital Readouts set to Boxes, you can select the data that will be displayed in each box. Use the Select Readouts menu
to set your standard digital readouts. Use the Select Nav Readouts menu to set the digital readouts that will be displayed during
navigation.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select Select Readouts or Select Nav Readouts. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select a readout window (Readout 1, 2, 3, etc.).
4. Select a digital readout.
Hide: To hide a readout window, select Off.
Digital Readouts with Boxes Selected (Down/Sonar Combo View)
readout 1
select
readouts
menu
readout 2
readout 3
readout 5
turned off
readout 4
readout 5
(off = blank)
digits format set
to large tenths
Views
32
Understand Digital Readouts
The following table displays the digital readouts that are available in the Select Readouts menu or the Select Nav Readouts menu.
The available digital readouts are determined by the installed equipment.
Navigation
Readout
Label
Name
Description
Bearing
Bearing
The direction to a destination waypoint measured in degrees from north.
COG
Course Over Ground
(Course)
The direction the boat is traveling measured in degrees from North.
When the COG is equal to Bearing, the boat is said to be on course and
will arrive at the destination in the most efficient manner.
The depth of the water from the transducer or digital depth sensor to
the bottom. This measurement includes the depth offset setting.
Depth
Depth
DTG
Distance to Go
(Distance)
The distance between the boat position and the next waypoint on the
route.
ETA
Estimated Time
of Arrival
The estimated time of arrival to the next waypoint on the route.
Position (#)
GPS
Speed
Speed
Speed is the measurement of the boat’s progress across a given
distance based on the speed measurement provided by the GPS.
Temp (#)
Temperature
The detected water temperature by the transducer’s internal
temperature probe or an accessory temperature sensor.
Time
Time
Time + Date
Time + Date
Timer
Timer
The digital readout for the timer set in the Alarms tab (see Manage your
Control Head: Start the Timer).
Triplog
Triplog
The elapsed time since the triplog was last reset, the distance traveled
since last reset, and the average speed during timed interval. To reset the
triplog, see Getting Started: Reset the Triplog.
TTG
Time to Go
The estimated time required to reach the next waypoint on the route. TTG
is calculated using the SOG (Speed Over Ground) and DTG (Distance to Go).
VLT
Voltage
XTE
Cross Track Error
If the depth number is flashing, it means the unit is having trouble
locating the bottom. This usually happens if the water is too deep, the
transducer is out of the water, the boat is moving too fast, etc.
The latitude and longitude coordinates of the boat position based on
the GPS receiver installation location.
The current time.
The current time and date.
Power supplied to the control head.
The straight-line distance of the boat from the intended route. XTE
measures how far the boat is off course.
33
Views
Combo Views
Combo views display two views (or more) on the screen at the same time. To change the settings, select menus or actions, or
change the size of either view, you must select the view as the Active Pane from the X-Press menu. The available combo views are
determined by your Humminbird model.
Selecting an Active Pane of the Chart/Sonar Combo View
indicates the selected
pane (Active Pane)
Sonar X-Press Menu
Chart X-Press Menu
split position
adjusts pane size
split position
adjusts pane size
Select an Active Pane
To change the settings in a combo view, or to use the cursor on a view, the individual view must be selected as the active pane.
1. X-Press Menu: With a Combo View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Active Pane.
3. Select a pane.
X-Press Menu: The X-Press Menu updates with the menus available for the active pane of the view.
Cursor: Press any arrow on the Cursor Control key to use the cursor on the active pane of the view.
Adjust the View Pane Size
Split Position allows you to adjust the size of the selected pane in a Combo View.
1. X-Press Menu: With a Combo View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Split Position.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the pane size.
Views
34
SONAR OVERVIEW
(SONAR, DI, SI, CHIRP)
A functioning transducer must be attached to the control head or Ethernet network to enable sonar functions. To purchase accessory
transducers or Ethernet hardware, visit our Web site at humminbird.com.
NOTE: Depth capability is affected by such factors as boat speed, wave action, bottom hardness, water conditions, and transducer
installation. See the Specifications section for details.
DualBeam PLUS Sonar (XNT 9 20 T)
The DualBeam PLUS sonar beams provide conical coverage directly below the
boat. DualBeam PLUS sonar returns are displayed on the traditional (2D) Sonar
Views. The beams can be blended together, viewed separately, or compared sideby-side.
20˚
200kHz
60˚
83kHz
The transducer has a narrowly focused 20° center beam, surrounded by a second
beam of 60°, expanding your coverage to an area equal to your depth. In 20 feet
of water, the wider beam covers an area 20 feet wide. The 83/200 kHz transducer
can provide depth coverage up to 1500 feet (500 m).
60 Degree Total Coverage
CHIRP Models: If your model is also CHIRP-capable, you can operate the beams at
different frequency ranges. CHIRP sonar sends continuous sonar pulses at varying
frequencies to provide more detailed returns and better target separation.
20˚
200kHz
60˚
83kHz
60 Degree Total Coverage
35
Sonar Overview
CHIRP Side Imaging Sonar (XNT 9 SI 180 T)
86˚
86˚
455kHz
455kHz
CHIRP Side Imaging sonar allows you to operate the beams at different frequency
ranges. CHIRP sonar sends continuous sonar pulses at varying frequencies to
provide more detailed returns and better target separation.
The Side Imaging transducer provides a wide yet precise survey of a large area
of water, including detailed bottom topography and fish-attracting structure
orientation.
20˚
200kHz
Typically, the Side Imaging sonar (shown in blue) can search a range of 200 ft
side to side. See the Side Imaging section for more information.
83kHz
The CHIRP Side Imaging transducer also provides Down Imaging views on the
screen, with a depth capability of 100 feet. See the Down Imaging section for
more information.
The DualBeam PLUS sonar beams (shown in magenta and yellow) provide conical
coverage directly below the boat. DualBeam PLUS sonar returns are displayed
on the traditional (2D) Sonar Views, and they will be used in the Side Imaging
View when an area directly under the boat does not have Side Imaging coverage.
The beams can be blended together, viewed separately, or compared side-byside.
CHIRP MEGA Side Imaging Sonar (XM 9 20 MSI T)
86°
86°
455k
455kHz
MEGA
CHIRP MEGA Side Imaging sonar provides Side Imaging sonar, Down Imaging
sonar, and DualBeam PLUS sonar on the control head.
455k
455kHz
MEGA
45°
800k
800kHz
75°
455k
455kHz
MEGA
20°
200k
200kHz
60°
83k
83kHz
180 Degree Total Coverage
Side Imaging sonar (shown in blue) uses two very precise sonar beams that are
aimed at right angles to the path of the boat. The side beam coverage is very
thin from front to back, yet very wide from top to bottom. The beams provide thin
slices of the bottom for high resolution imaging.
The Side Imaging beams can be operated at one of three frequencies: MEGA,
455 kHz, or 800 kHz. Select MEGA for the sharpest image with the highest
resolution for up to approximately 250 feet side to side. Select 800 kHz as an
alternative to the MEGA frequency, and select 455 kHz for greater bottom
coverage at approximately 800 feet side to side.
The Down Imaging beams (shown in green) point down and scan the water with
razor-thin, high definition beams. The beams are wide side to side, but very thin
from front to back. The beams can be operated at one of three frequencies:
MEGA, 455 kHz, or 800 kHz. Select MEGA for the sharpest image with the highest
resolution for up to approximately 125 feet. Select 800 kHz as an alternative to
the MEGA frequency, and select 455 kHz for the best overall image quality and
depth at 400 ft.
The DualBeam PLUS sonar beams (shown in magenta and yellow) provide conical
coverage directly below the boat. DualBeamPLUS sonar returns are displayed on
the Sonar (2D) Views. The beams can be blended together, viewed separately, or
compared side-by-side.
CHIRP sonar allows you to operate the beams at different frequency ranges.
CHIRP sonar sends continuous sonar pulses at varying frequencies to provide
more detailed returns and better target separation.
Sonar Overview
36
Down Imaging Sonar (XNT 9 DI T)
The Down Imaging transducer scans the water with razor-thin, high-definition
beams. The beams are wide (side to side) but very thin front to back.
45°
The Down Imaging beams (shown in green) can be operated at one of two
frequencies: 455 kHz (75°) or 800 kHz (45°). Select 455 kHz for the best overall
image quality and depth. Select 800 kHz for the sharpest image. See Set up Sonar
for more information.
800kHz
75°
455kHz
16°
455kHz
28°
200kHz
The transducer also uses conical beams to provide data in traditional 2D format
(shown in magenta and yellow). Select 455 kHz for a narrowly focused 16° center
beam, or select 200 kHz for a wider 28° beam (see Set up Sonar and Understand
the Sonar Views).
75 Degree Total Coverage
CHIRP Models: If your model is also CHIRP-capable, you can operate the beams at
different frequency ranges. CHIRP sonar sends continuous sonar pulses at varying
frequencies to provide more detailed returns and better target separation.
45°
800kHz
800k
75°
455k
455kHz
16°
455kHz
28°
200kHz
75 Degree Total Coverage
37
Sonar Overview
SET UP SONAR
(SONAR, DI, SI, CHIRP)
The available sonar views and menus on the control head are determined by the connected transducer and the selected transducer
source.
Most of the settings in this section were set up when you first powered on the unit using the Quick Setup Menu. Use
the instructions in this section to adjust those settings, set up an accessory transducer, or refine the information
shown on-screen.
Set up an Accessory Transducer
The control head will automatically select the transducer that was included with your control head. If your model is compatible with
an accessory transducer, and it is connected to the control head, select the transducer in the system so the beams are activated
and the related views are added to the control head. See Getting Started: Quick Setup for more information.
NOTE: To see the latest transducers that are compatible with your control head, visit our Web site at humminbird.com.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Connected Transducer.
3. Select the transducer connected to the unit.
To adjust the depth offset, see Manage your Control Head.
Adjust the Noise Filter
Use Noise Filter to limit the interference that may appear on the sonar views from sources such as your boat engine, turbulence,
or other sonar devices.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Noise Filter.
3. Select a filter setting, where Low is the lightest filter and High 3 filters the most interference.
Off: removes all filtering.
High: The high settings are useful when there is excessive trolling motor noise. However, in some deep water situations, the
High settings may hinder the control head’s ability to find the bottom.
Change the Max Depth
The Max Depth was set when you first configured the unit with the Quick Setup dialog box (see Getting Started: Quick Setup). Use
the instructions in this section to adjust the maximum depth setting.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Max Depth.
3. Select one of the following:
Auto: the control head will acquire bottom readings as needed (within the capabilities of the unit).
Set to match the body of water depth: the control head will not attempt to acquire sonar data below that depth, so more detail
will be shown on the display.
NOTE: Side Imaging units default to the Side Imaging range setting if the SI Range is set deeper than the Max Depth. See the Side
Imaging section for more information.
Set up Sonar
38
Select the Digital Depth Source (DI, CHIRP DI models only)
Depending on the depth, the control head will automatically choose the 2D conical beams or the Down Imaging beams to display
the depth digital readout. If the depth is deeper than 350 ft, or if you connect an ice transducer to the control head, set the
Digital Depth Source to 2D Element.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Digital Depth Source.
3. Select Auto or 2D Element.
Auto: The control head will acquire the digital depth as needed.
2D Element: Select 2D Element if the depth is deeper than 350 feet. Down Imaging is not available with this setting.
Turn on Max DI (CHIRP MEGA SI models only)
Max DI (On) is typically used for deep water to provide the maximum strength for the Down Imaging signal. Max DI (Off) typically
provides the best resolution in shallow water.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Max DI.
3. Select On or Off.
Change the Water Type
The Water Type was set when you first configured the unit with the Quick Setup dialog box (see Getting Started: Quick Setup). Water
Type affects the accuracy of deep water depth readings and configures the control head for operation in fresh or salt water. Use the
instructions in this section to change the Water Type setting.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Water Type.
3. Select one of the following for your water type and depth conditions:
Fresh
Salt (shallow)
Salt (deep): If the depth is more than 330 ft (100 m), select Salt (deep).
Change the Side Imaging Orientation (CHIRP MEGA SI models only)
Use SI Orientation to switch how the Side Imaging beams are displayed in the Side Imaging View. This menu option can be used if
the port and starboard beams are reversed during installation, which might be the case if a transducer is installed incorrectly. For
further assistance, contact Humminbird Customer Service.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select SI Orientation
3. Select Normal or Reverse.
39
Set up Sonar
Turn off Sonar
If you’re using your control head for GPS/Navigation functions only, use these instructions to hide all sonar views from the view
rotation. When it is set to Off, this setting also stops the unit from pinging, so all sonar operation is deactivated.
1. Press the POWER key.
2. Select Sonar.
3. Select Off.
NOTE: You can also turn on/off Sonar from the Main Menu > Setup tab > Sonar.
Turn on/off CHIRP (optional, CHIRP Models only)
To use CHIRP sonar, CHIRP mode must be turned on. The menu options are determined by the installed transducer and control
head model.
NOTE: Humminbird has provided the best settings for your unit. You can use the settings included with your control head, or you
can adjust these advanced options.
Turn on/off 2D CHIRP
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select CHIRP Configuration. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
If the menu is not shown in the Setup tab, select the Sonar tab.
3. Select 2D CHIRP Mode.
4. Select On or Off. (Default = On)
Turn on/off Down Imaging CHIRP
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select CHIRP Configuration.
3. Select DI CHIRP Mode or Imaging CHIRP Mode. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Select On or Off. (Default = On)
Turn on/off Side Imaging CHIRP
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select CHIRP Configuration. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select SI CHIRP Mode or Imaging CHIRP Mode.
4. Select On or Off. (Default = On)
Set up Sonar
40
Select Frequencies for the 2D Sonar View (optional)
Use the instructions in this section to select the frequencies that will be used for the 2D Sonar views. The menu options are
determined by the installed transducer and control head model.
NOTE: You can also change the frequency in the 2D Sonar View while you fish by pressing the CHECK key (see the 2D Sonar View
section: Adjust Settings While you Fish).
Display Frequency for the 2D Sonar View (HELIX 7 CHIRP GPS G2)
frequency
label
Select Frequencies for the (2D) Sonar View
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select 2D Display Frequency.
CHIRP Models: Select 2D CHIRP Display Frequency.
3. Select a frequency.
For details, see the tables on the following pages that refer to your control head model and whether 2D CHIRP Mode is on or off.
41
Set up Sonar
Sonar and Side Imaging Models
2D Display Frequency (CHIRP Off)
HELIX SONAR G2
Models
HELIX CHIRP GPS G2/G2N
HELIX CHIRP SI GPS G2/G2N
HELIX CHIRP MEGA SI GPS G2N
83 kHz
Select 83 kHz for deep water (more than 800 feet). 83 kHz can be used for deep returns at
high speed. If 83 kHz is selected, the 200 kHz beam pings in the background but is not
displayed.
200 kHz
Select 200 kHz for faster pinging and shallower water (less than 800 feet). If 200 kHz is
selected, the 83 kHz beam is not available.
Select 83/200 kHz to ensure both beams ping continuously, so the sonar history is not
interrupted if the Sonar View is closed.
83/200 kHz
The returns from both beams are blended by starting with the 83 kHz wide beam return,
dimming it, and then overlaying it with the 200 kHz narrow beam return. The 200 kHz narrow
beam sonar returns will stand out from the 83 kHz wide beam sonar returns.
Sonar and Side Imaging Models
2D CHIRP Display Frequency (CHIRP On)
HELIX SONAR G2
Models
HELIX CHIRP GPS G2/G2N
HELIX CHIRP SI GPS G2/G2N
HELIX CHIRP MEGA SI GPS G2N
Medium
Frequency
Select Medium Frequency for deep water (more than 800 feet). Medium Frequency can be
used for deep returns at high speed. If Medium Frequency is selected, the high frequency
beam pings in the background but is not displayed.
High Frequency
Select High Frequency for more detail at shallower depths (less than 800 feet). If High
Frequency is selected, the medium frequency beam is not available.
Select Medium/High Frequency to ensure both beams ping continuously, so the sonar history
is not interrupted if the Sonar View is closed.
Medium/High
Frequency
Set up Sonar
The returns from both beams are blended by starting with the wide beam return, dimming it,
and then overlaying it with the narrow beam return. The narrow beam sonar returns will stand
out from the wide beam sonar returns.
42
Frequency Options for the Sonar View
(XNT 9 DI T)
45°
800kHz
75°
455kHz
16°
455kHz
28°
200kHz
Down Imaging Models
2D Display Frequency (CHIRP Off)
HELIX DI G2
Models
HELIX CHIRP DI G2
HELIX CHIRP DI GPS G2/G2N
200 kHz
Select 200 kHz for greater bottom coverage in deep water (up to 600 feet).
455 kHz
Select 455 kHz for shallow water (up to 350 feet).
Down Imaging Models
2D CHIRP Display Frequency (CHIRP On)
HELIX DI G2
Models
HELIX CHIRP DI G2
HELIX CHIRP DI GPS G2/G2N
High Frequency
Select High Frequency for greater bottom coverage in deep water (up to 600 feet).
High (455 kHz)
Frequency
Select High (455 kHz) Frequency for shallow water (up to 350 feet).
43
Set up Sonar
Select a Frequency for the Down Imaging View (optional; DI, CHIRP DI, and CHIRP MEGA SI models only)
Use the instructions in this section to choose a frequency that will be used for the Down Imaging View. The menu options are
determined by the installed transducer and control head model.
NOTE: You can also change the frequency in the Down Imaging View while you fish by pressing the CHECK key (see the Down
Imaging section: Adjust Settings While you Fish).
Display Frequency for the Down Imaging View (HELIX 9 CHIRP DI GPS G2N)
frequency
label
Select a Frequency for the Down Imaging View
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. DI Models: Select Imaging Display Frequency.
CHIRP DI, CHIRP MEGA SI Models: Select DI CHIRP Display Frequency.
3. Select a frequency.
For details, see the tables on the following pages that refer to your control head model and whether CHIRP Mode is on or off.
Set up Sonar
44
Imaging Display Frequency Options
for the Down Imaging View
(XNT 9 DI T)
45°
800kHz
75°
455kHz
16°
455kHz
28°
200kHz
Down Imaging and CHIRP Down Imaging Models
DI Display Frequency or Imaging Display Frequency (CHIRP Off)
HELIX DI G2
Models
HELIX CHIRP DI G2
HELIX CHIRP DI GPS G2/G2N
455 kHz
Select 455 kHz for greater bottom coverage in deep water (up to 350 feet).
800 kHz
Select 800 kHz for shallow water and the sharpest image.
Down Imaging and CHIRP Down Imaging Models
DI CHIRP Display Frequency or Imaging Display Frequency (CHIRP On)
HELIX DI G2
Models
HELIX CHIRP DI G2
HELIX CHIRP DI GPS G2/G2N
455 kHz CHIRP
Select 455 kHz CHIRP for greater bottom coverage in deep water (up to 350 feet).
800 kHz CHIRP
Select 800 kHz CHIRP for shallow water and the sharpest image.
45
Set up Sonar
86°
86°
MEGA
MEGA
45°
800k
800kHz
75°
455k
455kHz
MEGA
20°
200k
200kHz
60°
83k
83kHz
1
CHIRP MEGA SI Models
DI Display Frequency (CHIRP Off, On)
Models
HELIX CHIRP MEGA SI GPS G2N
MEGA
Select MEGA for the highest resolution, sharpness, and range (up to 125 ft).
800 kHz
Select 800 kHz as an alternative frequency with sharp returns (up to 125 ft).
455 kHz
Select 455 kHz for deep water and overall coverage (up to 400 ft).
Set the Down Imaging Beam Width (optional, XNT 9 SI 180 T only)
If the XNT 9 SI 180 T (Compact Side Imaging transducer) is installed, you can set the width of the beam (side to side) used for the
Down Imaging View. To see only the data directly under your boat, select Narrow. Medium reveals more information, while Wide
displays the maximum information available from the Down Imaging beam width. See Understand the Down Imaging View for more
information.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Down Imaging Beam Width.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a width.
Set up Sonar
46
Select a Frequency for the Side Imaging View (optional, CHIRP MEGA SI Models only)
Use the instructions in this section to choose a frequency that will be used for the Side Imaging View.
NOTE: You can also change the frequency in the Side Imaging View while you fish by pressing the CHECK key (see the Side Imaging
section: Adjust Settings While you Fish).
Display Frequency for the Side Imaging View (CHIRP MEGA SI)
(HELIX 9 CHIRP SI GPS G2N)
frequency
label
Select a Frequency for the Side Imaging View
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select SI CHIRP Display Frequency.
3. Select a frequency.
CHIRP MEGA SI Models
SI Display Frequency, SI CHIRP Display Frequency
(CHIRP Off, On)
Models
HELIX CHIRP MEGA SI GPS G2N
MEGA
Select MEGA for the highest resolution, sharpness, and range (up to 250 ft side to side).
800 kHz
Select 800 kHz as an alternative frequency with sharp returns (up to 250 ft side to side).
455 kHz
Select 455 kHz for deep water and overall coverage (up to 800 ft side to side).
47
Set up Sonar
Adjust the CHIRP Frequency Spectrum (optional, CHIRP models only)
Your control head has been configured with the best settings for a wide range of fishing conditions, and we recommend using the
entire CHIRP frequency spectrum included with your unit. However, you can adjust the CHIRP Frequency Spectrum to limit the
interferences on the display or refine the settings to your preference. The menu options are determined by the installed transducer
and control head model.
Requirements: CHIRP mode must be turned on. The menus are also determined by the display frequency you have selected for
each view.
WARNING! If an accessory transducer is installed, confirm it is configured in the control head. See Set up an Accessory
Transducer for details. For information about accessory transducers, visit our Web site at humminbird.com.
Adjust the 2D CHIRP Frequency Spectrum
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select CHIRP Configuration. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
If the menu is not shown in the Setup tab, select the Sonar tab.
3. Select 2D CHIRP Frequency Spectrum. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Select a frequency menu.
5. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a setting.
6. Repeat: Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the Start Frequency and End Frequency for each beam.
7. Close: Press the EXIT key.
Adjust the Down Imaging CHIRP Frequency Spectrum
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select CHIRP Configuration. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
If the menu is not shown in the Setup tab, select the Sonar tab.
3. Select DI CHIRP Frequency Spectrum or Imaging CHIRP Frequency Spectrum. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Select a frequency menu.
5. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a setting.
6. Repeat: Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the Start Frequency and End Frequency for each beam.
7. Close the Submenu: Press the EXIT key.
Adjust the Side Imaging CHIRP Frequency Spectrum
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select CHIRP Configuration. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
If the menu is not shown in the Setup tab, select the Sonar tab.
3. Select SI CHIRP Frequency Spectrum. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Select a frequency menu.
5. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a setting.
6. Repeat: Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the Start Frequency and End Frequency for each beam.
7. Close the Submenu: Press the EXIT key.
Set up Sonar
48
Reset CHIRP Configuration Settings
Use the following instructions to reset the CHIRP menu settings to the factory defaults.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select CHIRP Configuration. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Local CHIRP Configuration Reset. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
49
Set up Sonar
DISPLAY A SONAR VIEW ON-SCREEN
There are a variety of views available to display sonar data. You can customize the view by showing or hiding information (see
Customize the Sonar View), and you can adjust the sonar settings to refine the information displayed on-screen (see Adjust Sonar
Display Settings and Adjust Settings While you Fish). The changes you make are applied to all traditional 2D sonar views.
Display a Sonar View
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select Sonar > Sonar View, Sonar Zoom View, Split Sonar View, etc.
Sonar View
Big Digits View
Sonar Zoom View
Split Sonar View
For more information, see
Review Sonar History and Zoom In/Zoom Out.
For more information, see
Compare Sonar Beams.
Circular Flasher View
For more information, see
Display the Circular Flasher View On-Screen.
NOTE: The available views are determined by your control head model and the installed transducer. For a complete list of the
views available on your control head, press the MENU key twice, and select the Views tab. See each related section of the manual
(Views, Down Imaging, Side Imaging, Navigation Overview, etc.) for more information.
Sonar (2D)
50
Display a Sonar Combo View
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. To open a Sonar Combo View, select Sonar.
To open a Chart Combo View (Sonar and Chart together), select Chart.
3. Select a view to display on-screen.
Sonar > Down/Sonar Combo View
Sonar > Side/Sonar Combo View
Chart > Chart/Sonar Combo View
For more information, see
the Down Imaging section.
For more information, see
the Side Imaging section.
For more information, see
Navigation Overview.
NOTE: The available views are determined by your control head model and the installed transducer. For a complete list of the
views available on your control head, press the MENU key twice, and select the Views tab. See each related section of the manual
(Views, Down Imaging, Side Imaging, Navigation Overview, etc.) for more information.
51
Sonar (2D)
UNDERSTAND THE SONAR VIEWS
As the boat moves, the unit charts the changes in depth on the display to create a profile of the bottom contour. The
Sonar View displays the sonar return intensity with different colors.
Strong returns often result from rocky or hard bottoms (compacted sediment, rocks, fallen trees), while weaker returns often result
from soft bottoms (sand, mud), vegetation, and small fish.
The colors used to represent high, medium, to low intensity returns are determined by the palette you choose in the Sonar Colors
menu (see Customize the Sonar View).
The control head displays the return intensity based on the Sonar Colors and Bottom View menu settings. You can display the RTS
Window (Real Time Sonar), turn on/off fish symbols (Fish ID+), change the SwitchFire mode, adjust sensitivity, and more.
2D Sonar View: Sonar Colors Palette 1
strong
Color Bar
weak
strong returns
(possibly rocks, tree limbs,
or other structure)
weak returns
(possibly vegetation
or small fish)
strong returns
(possibly compacted
sediment or rocks)
Sonar History — Historical returns scroll left across the view.
Sonar (2D)
52
medium returns
CUSTOMIZE THE SONAR VIEW
You can customize the sonar views by showing or hiding information, such as the temperature graph, depth lines, color bar, and RTS
Window. You can also change the color palette.
Customizing the Sonar View
temperature
graph
depth lines
temperature
(digital readout
overlay)
speed
(digital readout
overlay)
depth
(digital readout
overlay)
RTS Window
(A-Scope)
53
color
bar
Sonar (2D)
Show/Hide the Frequency Label
The Frequency Label displays the currently selected frequencies. See Set up Sonar.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Frequency Label.
3. Select On (show) or Off (hide).
2D Sonar View with Frequency Label Turned On (HELIX 9 CHIRP SI GPS G2N)
selected
display
frequency
Sonar (2D)
selected
frequency
spectrum
54
Customize the RTS Window
The RTS Window plots the depth and intensity of a sonar return. It updates at the fastest rate possible for depth conditions and
shows only the returns from the bottom, structure, and fish that are within the transducer beam. When you use the cursor to review
sonar history, the sonar history will freeze, but the RTS Window will continue to display sonar returns in real time. See Review Sonar
History and Zoom In/Zoom Out.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select RTS Window.
3. Select the type of RTS Window to display.
Mono
Sonar returns are displayed in black.
Color (Full)
Sonar returns are displayed in color, and they fill the width of the RTS Window.
Color (A-Scope)
Sonar returns are displayed in color. The size of the displayed lines correspond with the
intensity of the sonar returns from the transducer beam(s).
Off
The RTS Window is hidden.
Show/Hide Data on the Sonar View
The settings in this section are shared with the Down Imaging View, so turning them on or off will change what is shown on the Sonar
Views and the Down Imaging Views.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select a menu and change it to On (show) or Off (hide).
Depth Lines
The depth lines show incremental marks between the upper and lower depth range. See Adjust
Sonar Display Settings for details.
Color Bar
The Color Bar shows the palette selected on the Sonar View (see Change the View Colors) from
weak to strong returns.
Temperature
Graph
The temperature graph displays the temperature changes over the recent sonar history. A
temperature input from the installed transducer or temp/speed accessory is required to enable
this feature.
NOTE: Digital readouts can be displayed as an overlay, or they can be displayed in data boxes (see Views: Display Digital
Readouts).
55
Sonar (2D)
Change the View Colors
The Sonar Colors menu changes the colors used to display sonar returns on the view.
Sonar View with Customized Sonar Colors
color bar with
sonar colors set
to palette 4
Strong
Weak
RTS Window
Change the Sonar Colors Palette
1. Sonar X-Press Menu: With a Sonar View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Sonar Colors.
3. Select a palette.
NOTE: To display or hide the Color Bar, see Show/Hide Data on the Sonar View.
Sonar (2D)
56
Adjusting the Contrast
The high Contrast
setting uses the
top portion of
palette.
color bar
Select a Range of the Palette (Contrast)
Contrast allows you to choose a range of the Sonar Colors palette to display sonar returns. To see the current palette, display the
Color Bar on the Sonar View.
NOTE: To display or hide the Color Bar, see Show/Hide Data on the Sonar View.
When Contrast is set to 20 (default), the entire Sonar Colors palette (represented by the Color Bar) is used to display weak and strong
sonar returns. As you increase the Contrast, the top range of the Color Bar is used to display all sonar returns (whether weak or
strong). As you decrease the Contrast, the bottom range of the Color Bar is used to display all sonar returns (whether weak or
strong).
1. Sonar X-Press Menu: With a Sonar View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Contrast.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to move the selection higher or lower on the color bar.
57
Sonar (2D)
ADJUST SONAR DISPLAY SETTINGS
Use the instructions in this section to adjust how the sonar returns are shown on the Sonar View, so you can tune into what you want
to see in the display. The settings in this section are optional. You can use the default display settings for the Sonar View, or you
can customize it with your preferences.
Filter Surface Clutter
Use Surface Clutter to reduce the noise that may appear at the top of the view caused by algae and aeration. The lower the setting,
the less surface clutter will be displayed. A higher setting allows more surface clutter to be displayed.
NOTE: You can also adjust the Noise Filter (see Set up Sonar: Adjust the Noise Filter).
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Surface Clutter.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Change the 2D SwitchFire Mode
SwitchFire controls how the sonar returns are displayed in the Sonar Views.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select 2D SwitchFire.
3. Select Clear Mode or Max Mode.
2D SwitchFire: Clear Mode
2D SwitchFire: Max Mode
Choose Clear Mode to see less clutter and more fish size accuracy on the display.
When Clear Mode is selected, the clutter is filtered, and sonar returns are
interpreted to provide more details about the objects within the transducer beam,
regardless of their location. In other words, a large arch on the display means a
large fish has been detected.
Choose Max Mode to see only raw sonar returns on the display. When Max Mode
is selected, you will see the maximum sonar information available within the
transducer beam, so more fish arches and better jig tracking are shown.
Sonar (2D)
58
Turn on/off Fish ID+ Settings
Fish ID+ uses advanced signal processing to interpret sonar returns and will display a fish symbol on the Sonar View when very
selective requirements are met. Also, if Fish ID+ is turned on, you can adjust the sensitivity used for detection and receive alerts with
the Fish ID Alarm turned on.
Fish ID+ Turned On
depth
Fish ID+ symbol
(200 kHz beam)
Turn on/off Fish ID+
When Fish ID+ is turned on, fish symbols will be shown on the Sonar View. The color of the fish symbols indicates the sonar beam
location, and the fish depth is shown above the symbol.
When Fish ID+ is turned off, the control head shows only the raw sonar returns on the display.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Fish ID+.
3. Select On or Off.
Fish Symbols will display in the Sonar View when a fish is detected.
On
Orange Fish Symbols = targets detected in the 200 kHz narrow beam.
Green Fish Symbols = targets detected in the 83 kHz wide beam or 455 kHz beam (DI, CHIRP
DI only).
Off
Raw sonar returns are shown on the Sonar View. If a fish is detected, the returns appear as
arches on the display to indicate potential targets.
59
Sonar (2D)
Adjust the Fish ID Sensitivity
Use Fish ID Sensitivity to adjust the threshold used for detecting a fish with Fish ID+. To display only larger species of fish as fish
symbols, select a low setting. To see smaller fish species or baitfish, select a high setting. Fish ID+ must be turned on to enable this
menu.
1. Turn on Fish ID+.
2. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
3. Select Fish ID Sensitivity.
4. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
1 = low sensitivity (large fish only)
10 = high sensitivity (All: small fish up to large fish)
Turn on the Fish ID Alarm
To receive an on-screen alert when a fish is detected, turn on the Fish ID Alarm. Fish ID+ must be turned on to enable this alarm.
1. Turn on Fish ID+.
2. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Alarms tab.
3. Select Fish ID Alarm.
4. Select one of the following icons:
Off
All
Large/Medium
Large
Sonar (2D)
60
Set the Bottom View Display
Bottom View selects the method used to represent bottom and structure on the display. Bottom View is also affected by the palette
selected in Sonar Colors (see Customize the Sonar View: Change the View Colors).
Bottom View set to WhiteLine
color bar with
sonar colors
set to palette 1
white shows
strongest
returns
white shows strongest returns
RTS Window
Change the Bottom View Setting
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Bottom View.
3. Select one of the following modes:
Structure ID
Structure ID will display the strongest return as specified by the palette selected in the Sonar
Colors menu.
WhiteLine
WhiteLine highlights the strongest sonar returns in white. This has the benefit of clearly
defining the bottom on the display.
61
Sonar (2D)
ADJUST SETTINGS WHILE YOU FISH
(SONAR X-PRESS MENU)
The X-Press Menu provides menu options to adjust the sensitivity and range as you fish. You can also control how fast the sonar
history scrolls across the screen. The menus allow you to see more or less of the sonar returns from the transducer beams as you
adjust each setting. Also, you can use key shortcuts on the view.
Adjusting Settings from the Sonar X-Press Menu (HELIX 7 CHIRP SI GPS G2)
surface
clutter
upper range
RTS Window
lower range
chart speed
Sonar (2D)
62
Adjust the Sensitivity
Sensitivity controls how much detail is shown on the view. To eliminate the clutter from the display that is sometimes present in
murky or muddy water, decrease the sensitivity. When operating in very clear water or greater depths, increase the sensitivity to see
weaker returns.
Adjust the Sensitivity using the X-Press Menu
Use the following instructions to adjust the sensitivity.
1. Sonar X-Press Menu: With a Sonar View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Sensitivity.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to increase or decrease the sensitivity.
Adjust the Sensitivity using the ZOOM Keys
If your control head includes +/-ZOOM keys, you can use them to adjust the sensitivity.
1. With a Sonar View displayed on-screen, press the +ZOOM key or −ZOOM key.
Adjusting the Sensitivity using the +/−ZOOM Keys
Increase Sensitivity
Decrease Sensitivity
63
Sonar (2D)
Adjust Beam Sensitivity
Your control head model may allow you to adjust the sensitivity of individual frequencies. The available frequencies are determined
by your control head model and the installed transducer. Use the following instructions to adjust a single beam.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select 83 kHz Sensitivity or 455 kHz Sensitivity.
CHIRP Models: Select Medium Sensitivity Offset or High (455 kHz) Sensitivity Offset (DI, CHIRP DI models only).
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to increase or decrease the sensitivity.
For example, in the illustration shown below, the sensitivity of the 83 kHz beam in the Split Sonar View can be adjusted without
affecting the sensitivity of the 200 kHz sonar returns. For more information about this view, see Compare Sonar Beams.
Increasing the Sensitivity of the 83 kHz Beam (83 kHz/200 kHz)
83 kHz
200 kHz
upper range
frequency
lower range
frequency
lower range
Select a Range of the Palette (Contrast)
Contrast allows you to choose a range of the Sonar Colors palette to display sonar returns. To see the current palette, display the
Color Bar on the Sonar View. For details, see Customize the Sonar View: Change the View Colors and Show/Hide Data on the Sonar
View.
When Contrast is set to 20 (default), the entire Sonar Colors palette (represented by the Color Bar) is used to display weak and strong
sonar returns. As you increase the Contrast, the top range of the Color Bar is used to display all sonar returns (whether weak or
strong). As you decrease the Contrast, the bottom range of the Color Bar is used to display all sonar returns (whether weak or
strong).
1. Sonar X-Press Menu: With a Sonar View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Contrast.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to move the selection higher or lower on the color bar.
Sonar (2D)
64
Set the Upper/Lower Range
Upper Range and Lower Range control how much of the water column is displayed on the view. For example, if you are only interested
in the area between 20 and 50 feet deep, set the Upper Range to 20 and the Lower Range to 50. The view will not display sonar
returns outside of the set ranges, and greater detail for the selected range will be displayed.
1. Sonar X-Press Menu (Advanced User Mode): With a Sonar View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Upper Range. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
3. Select Lower Range. Select Auto or set a specific depth (manual).
Auto: The Lower Range will be adjusted by the control head to follow the bottom automatically.
Manual : The control head locks onto the depth you select.
NOTE: There must be a difference of 10 feet between the upper and lower range settings.
Change the Chart Speed
Chart Speed controls how fast the sonar history moves across the view and how much detail is shown. A faster speed is preferred
by most anglers, and the sonar history moves quickly across the view. To slow down the sonar history display, select a lower setting.
Regardless of the Chart Speed setting, the RTS Window will update at the maximum rate possible for depth conditions.
1. Sonar X-Press Menu: With a Sonar View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Chart Speed.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Turn on/off Jigging Mode (CHIRP SI, CHIRP MEGA SI models only)
If you have a CHIRP SI or CHIRP MEGA SI model, you can use Jigging Mode to refine the sonar returns shown in the Sonar View. This
setting is influenced by whether 2D CHIRP Mode is turned on or off. See Set up Sonar for more information.
1. Sonar X-Press Menu: With a Sonar View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Jigging Mode.
3. Select On or Off.
On
Turn on Jigging Mode if you’ve selected Medium or Medium/High Frequency in the 2D CHIRP
Display Frequency menu (with 2D CHIRP Mode turned on), or if you've selected 83 kHz or 83/200
kHz in the 2D Display Frequency menu (with 2D CHIRP Mode turned off). When Jigging Mode is
turned on, the sonar returns are refined on the view, and the chart speed slows down to show
more detail.
Off
Turn off Jigging Mode if you’ve selected Low Frequency in the 2D CHIRP Display Frequency
menu (with 2D CHIRP Mode turned on), or if you've selected 200 kHz in the 2D Display
Frequency menu (with 2D CHIRP Mode turned off). Turn off Jigging Mode to display the sonar
history at the selected chart speed and see coarser returns on the display.
65
Sonar (2D)
Change the Sonar Colors Palette
The Sonar X-Press Menu allows you to quickly change the display palette while you fish. See Customize the Sonar View: Change the
View Colors for more information.
1. Sonar X-Press Menu: With a Sonar View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Sonar Colors.
3. Select a palette.
NOTE: To display or hide the Color Bar, see Customize the Sonar View.
Switch Frequencies
If the transducer includes more than one downbeam frequency, use the CHECK/INFO key to quickly change the frequency used in
the 2D Sonar View. For more information see Sonar Overview and Set up Sonar.
1. With a Sonar View displayed on-screen, press the CHECK/INFO key.
Using the CHECK key to Switch Frequencies
frequency
label
Switch Frequencies
Sonar (2D)
66
COMPARE SONAR BEAMS
(SPLIT SONAR VIEW)
Split Sonar View displays sonar returns from each down beam frequency on separate sides of the view. You can use this view to make
side by side comparisons between the sonar returns from both beams. The beams are determined by your Humminbird model and
the installed transducer.
Frequencies: Use this view to compare the 83 kHz and 200 kHz beams. If you have a DI or CHIRP DI model, 455 kHz and 200
kHz will be displayed side by side in this view. When 2D CHIRP Mode is turned on, you can also compare beams.
Fish ID+: It is also helpful to turn on Fish ID+ in Split Sonar View so you can see where the fish are located within each transducer
beam (see Adjust Sonar Display Settings: Turn on/off Fish ID+ Settings).
Display the Split Sonar View
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select Sonar > Split Sonar View.
Reviewing Beams Separately in Split Sonar View (83 kHz/200 kHz)
83 kHz
200 kHz
upper range
frequency
lower range
frequency
67
lower range
Sonar (2D)
REVIEW SONAR HISTORY
Press any arrow on the Cursor Control key, and the sonar history will freeze and the cursor will display on-screen. If you move the
cursor over a sonar return, digital readouts for the cursor position are displayed on the view. The RTS Window continues to update
at the fastest rate possible for depth conditions (see Customize the Sonar View).
Freeze the Sonar History
1. Press any arrow on the Cursor Control key.
2. Move the cursor over a sonar return.
NOTE: To mark a waypoint or start navigation to the cursor position, see Navigation in Sonar Views.
Reviewing the Depth of the Cursor Position
cursor depth
depth below cursor
distance to cursor position
bearing to cursor position
cursor
digital
readouts
RTS Window
cursor
Move the Cursor
Sonar (2D)
68
ZOOM IN/ZOOM OUT
Use the Sonar Zoom View to see a magnified view of the bottom and structure. For example, if there are fish close to the bottom
or near structure (tree, vegetation, etc.), Sonar Zoom View makes it easier to see the separate sonar returns that might be displayed
close together.
Display the Sonar Zoom View
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select Sonar > Sonar Zoom View.
Zoom In/Zoom Out using the ZOOM Keys
If your control head includes +/− ZOOM keys, use the instructions in this section to use the ZOOM feature.
Magnify Bottom Structure (Zoom In/Out)
1. Display the Sonar Zoom View on-screen.
2. Zoom In: Press the +ZOOM key.
Zoom Out: Press the –Zoom key.
Magnify the Cursor Position (Zoom In/Out)
1. Display the Sonar Zoom View on-screen.
2. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position on the view.
3. Zoom In: Press the +ZOOM key.
Zoom Out: Press the -Zoom key.
4. Close: Press the EXIT key.
69
Sonar (2D)
Magnifying Sonar Returns in Sonar Zoom View (Bottom Lock Off)
zoom level
upper range, zoom view
upper range, full range view
zoomed
view
full range
zoom
preview
range
lower range, zoom view
lower range, full range view
OR
ZOOM In
Sonar (2D)
ZOOM Out
Move the Cursor
70
ZOOM In
Zoom In/Zoom Out using the X-Press Menu
If your control head does not include ZOOM keys, you will use the Zoom Level menu to use the ZOOM feature.
Magnify Bottom Structure (Zoom In/Out)
1. Display the Sonar Zoom View on-screen.
2. Press the MENU key once.
3. Select Zoom Level.
4. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Magnify the Cursor Position (Zoom In/Out)
1. Display the Sonar Zoom View on-screen.
2. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position on the view.
3. Press the MENU key once.
4. Select Zoom Level.
5. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
6. Close: Press the EXIT key.
71
Sonar (2D)
Adjust Sonar Zoom View Display Settings
Turn on/off Bottom Lock
Use Bottom Lock and Bottom Range to focus on the bottom and control how much of the water column is shown in Sonar Zoom
View. Bottom Lock continuously graphs the bottom at a constant point on the display regardless of changes in depth. This “flattens”
out the bottom contour but is effective at showing fish on or near the bottom.
1. Sonar X-Press Menu: With a Sonar Zoom View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Bottom Lock. Press the RIGHT Cursor key to select On.
3. Press the UP Cursor key. Select Bottom Range.
4. Press the RIGHT or Left Cursor keys to adjust the range. The range is measured up from the bottom.
Low Setting: useful for seeing low-lying bottom structure or details of the bottom return.
High Setting: useful for seeing large structure in deeper water.
NOTE: If you see a wavy band on the view that mirrors the change in depth, the Bottom Range might be set deeper than the actual
water depth. In this case, decrease the Bottom Range setting.
Change the Width of the Zoomed View
Use the instructions in this section to change the width of the zoomed view in Sonar Zoom View.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Zoom Width.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Setting the Bottom Range and Zoom Width (Bottom Lock On)
zoomed
view
full range
zoom
preview,
bottom
range
zoom width (wide)
Sonar (2D)
72
NAVIGATION IN SONAR VIEWS
To mark waypoints and start navigation, the control head must have a GPS Fix from a connected or internal GPS receiver. See
Getting Started for more information.
Mark a Waypoint
You can mark a waypoint at the boat position or the cursor position. Waypoints are saved to the Waypoint Management dialog box
(see Manage your Navigation Data).
Mark a Waypoint at the Boat Position
1. Press the MARK key.
Mark a Waypoint at the Cursor Position
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position on the view.
2. Press the MARK key twice.
Marking a Waypoint at the Cursor Position
cursor depth
depth below cursor
distance to cursor position
bearing to cursor position
cursor
digital
readouts
cursor
Press Twice to
Mark a Waypoint
Move the Cursor
73
Sonar (2D)
Navigate to a Position
Use the instructions in this section to start navigation to a position in the view. See Navigation Overview for more information about
these features.
Navigate to the Cursor Position
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position on the view.
2. Press the GOTO key twice.
When you press the GOTO key, a waypoint will be marked at the cursor position.
Navigate to a Saved Position
If you press the GOTO key, you can choose to start navigation from a list of saved waypoints and routes.
1. Press the GOTO key.
2. Select Nav Data. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to select a saved waypoint or route.
4. Press the RIGHT Cursor key to start navigation.
Cancel Navigation
1. Press the MENU key once.
2. Select Cancel Navigation. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Sonar (2D)
74
Starting Navigation to the Cursor Position
cursor depth
depth below cursor
distance to cursor position
bearing to cursor position
cursor
digital
readouts
cursor
Press Twice to
Start Navigation
Move the Cursor
75
Sonar (2D)
DISPLAY THE CIRCULAR FLASHER VIEW ON-SCREEN
(HELIX 5, HELIX 7 ONLY)
Circular Flasher View provides two ways to view sonar data in traditional flasher format. The view is controlled by the Ice Fishing Mode
menu in the Sonar tab.
Display the Circular Flasher View
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select Sonar > Circular Flasher View.
Circular Flasher View with
Ice Fishing Mode Turned On
Turn on Ice Fishing Mode
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Ice Fishing Mode.
3. Select On.
On
When Ice Fishing Mode is on, the Circular Flasher View displays Real Time Sonar (RTS) returns
in traditional flasher format with additional features, including Depth Cursor and Zoom.
Off
When Ice Fishing Mode is off, the Circular Flasher View displays Real Time Sonar (RTS) returns
in traditional flasher format.
Select the Digital Depth Source (DI, CHIRP DI models only)
If you connect an ice transducer to the HELIX DI G2, HELIX CHIRP DI G2, or HELIX CHIRP DI GPS G2/G2N control head, set the Digital
Depth Source to 2D Element. See Set up Sonar for details.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Digital Depth Source.
3. Select 2D Element.
Circular Flasher
76
UNDERSTAND THE CIRCULAR FLASHER VIEW
You can use the Circular Flasher View with Ice Fishing Mode turned on or off. When Ice Fishing Mode is turned on, the view is
maximized with information you need for ice fishing, including the depth, connected battery power percentage, and related menu
settings.
Like a traditional sonar view, the Circular Flasher View displays the sonar return intensity with different colors.
Strong returns often result from rocky or hard bottoms (compacted sediment, rocks, fallen trees), while weaker returns often result
from soft bottoms (sand, mud), vegetation, and small fish.
The colors used to represent high, medium, to low intensity returns are determined by the palette you choose (see Adjust Settings
While you Fish: Change the Sonar Colors Palette).
Circular Flasher View with Ice Fishing Mode Turned On
zoom level
percentage
of power for
connected
battery
depth
sensitivity
NOTE: To change the beam frequency or adjust the noise filter, see Set up Sonar.
77
Circular Flasher
ADJUST SETTINGS WHILE YOU FISH
(SONAR X-PRESS MENU)
The X-Press Menu provides menu options to adjust the sensitivity and range as you fish. The menus allow you to see more or less
of the sonar returns from the transducer beams as you adjust each setting. Also, you can use key shortcuts on the view.
Adjusting Settings from the X-Press Menu (HELIX 7 CHIRP SI GPS G2)
Adjust the Sensitivity
Sensitivity controls how much detail is shown on the view. To eliminate the clutter from the display that is sometimes present in
murky or muddy water, decrease the sensitivity. When operating in very clear water or greater depths, increase the sensitivity to see
weaker returns.
Adjust the Sensitivity using the X-Press Menu
Use the following instructions to adjust the sensitivity.
1. Circular Flasher X-Press Menu: With the Circular Flasher View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Sensitivity.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to increase or decrease the sensitivity.
Circular Flasher
78
Select a Range of the Palette (Contrast)
Contrast allows you to choose a range of the Color Palette to display sonar returns. You can see a preview of the palette in the Color
Palette menu. For details, see Change the Sonar Colors Palette.
When Contrast is set to 20 (default), the entire palette is used to display weak and strong sonar returns. As you increase the
Contrast, the right range of the palette is used to display all sonar returns (whether weak or strong). As you decrease the Contrast,
the left range of the palette is used to display all sonar returns (whether weak or strong).
1. Circular Flasher X-Press Menu: With the Circular Flasher View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Contrast.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to move the selection left or right on the palette.
Adjusting the Contrast
The low Contrast setting uses the left portion of the palette.
Set the Upper/Lower Range
Upper Range and Lower Range control how much of the water column is displayed on the view. For example, if you are only interested
in the area between 20 and 50 feet deep, set the Upper Range to 20 and the Lower Range to 50. The view will not display sonar
returns outside of the set ranges, and greater detail for the selected range will be displayed.
1. Circular Flasher X-Press Menu: With the Circular Flasher View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Upper Range. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
3. Select Lower Range. Select Auto or set a specific depth (manual).
Auto: The Lower Range will be adjusted by the control head to follow the bottom automatically.
Manual : The control head locks onto the depth you select.
NOTE: There must be a difference of 10 feet between the upper and lower range settings.
79
Circular Flasher
Change the Sonar Colors Palette
The X-Press Menu allows you to quickly change the display palette while you fish. If Ice Fishing Mode is on, additional palettes are
available (F1, F2, F3). The Color Palette menu shows a preview of the palette, and the weak to strong sonar return range is displayed
from left to right.
1. Circular Flasher X-Press Menu: With the Circular Flasher View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. If Ice Fishing Mode is on, select Color Palette.
If Ice Fishing Mode is off, select Sonar Colors.
3. Select a palette.
Changing the Color Palette
palette preview (weak to strong)
Turn on/off Jigging Mode (Side Imaging models only)
If you have a Side Imaging model, you can use Jigging Mode to refine the sonar returns shown in the Sonar View. This setting is
influenced by whether 2D CHIRP Mode is turned on or off. See Set up Sonar for more information.
1. Circular Flasher X-Press Menu: With a Sonar View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Jigging Mode.
3. Select On or Off.
Circular Flasher
80
On
Turn on Jigging Mode if you’ve selected Medium or Medium/High Frequency in the 2D CHIRP
Display Frequency menu (with 2D CHIRP Mode turned on), or if you've selected 83 kHz or 83/200
kHz in the 2D Display Frequency menu (with 2D CHIRP Mode turned off). When Jigging Mode is
turned on, the sonar returns are refined on the view, and the chart speed slows down to show
more detail.
Off
Turn off Jigging Mode if you’ve selected Low Frequency in the 2D CHIRP Display Frequency
menu (with 2D CHIRP Mode turned on), or if you've selected 200 kHz in the 2D Display
Frequency menu (with 2D CHIRP Mode turned off). Turn off Jigging Mode to display the sonar
history at the selected chart speed and see coarser returns on the display.
Switch Frequencies
If the transducer includes more than one downbeam frequency, use the CHECK/INFO key to quickly change the frequency used in
the Circular Flasher View. For more information see Set up Sonar.
1. Press the CHECK/INFO key.
Using the CHECK key to Switch Frequencies
frequency
label
Switch Frequencies
81
Circular Flasher
MOVE THE DEPTH CURSOR
Use the Depth Cursor to identify a depth on the Circular Flasher View.
NOTE: Ice Fishing Mode must be turned on to enable this feature (see Display the Circular Flasher View On-Screen).
1. Activate: Press the DOWN Cursor key, and the purple cursor line will display on the dial.
2. Adjust the Cursor: Press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys.
3. EXIT: Press the EXIT key.
Circular Flasher View with Depth Cursor Displayed
depth cursor
setting
depth cursor
(purple line)
Move the Cursor
Circular Flasher
82
ZOOM IN/OUT IN CIRCULAR FLASHER VIEW
The Zoom feature displays a 2x magnified view of the area you choose on the Circular Flasher View.
NOTE: Ice Fishing Mode must be turned on to enable this feature (see Display the Circular Flasher View On-Screen).
ZOOM In/Out using the ZOOM Keys
1. Activate: Press the +ZOOM key.
2. Adjust the Zoom Range: Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to move the white zoom lines on the flasher dial.
3. Close Zoom: Press -ZOOM key.
ZOOM In/Out using the Circular Flasher X-Press Menu
If your control head model does not include ZOOM keys, you will use the Zoom Level menu.
1. Circular Flasher X-Press Menu: With the Circular Flasher View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Zoom Level.
3. Select 2X.
4. Adjust the Zoom Range: Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to move the white zoom lines on the flasher dial.
5. Close Zoom: Press the MENU key. Select Zoom Level > 1X.
83
Circular Flasher
Magnifying Sonar Returns in the Circular Flasher View
normal view
(reading the full depth
of the water column)
zoom line
(lower limit)
zoom line
(upper limit)
zoom view
(2X magnification)
ZOOM In
Circular Flasher
Move the Zoom Range
84
DISPLAY A DOWN IMAGING VIEW ON-SCREEN
(DOWN IMAGING AND SIDE IMAGING MODELS ONLY)
There are a variety of views available to display Down Imaging data. You can also customize the view by showing or hiding information
(see Customize the Down Imaging View), and you can adjust the sonar settings to refine the information displayed on-screen (see
Adjust Settings While you Fish). The changes you make are applied to all Down Imaging views.
Display a Down Imaging View
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select Sonar > Down Imaging View.
Down Imaging View
Display a Down Imaging Combo View
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. To open a Down Imaging Combo View, select Sonar.
To open a Chart Combo View (Down Imaging and Chart together), select Chart.
3. Select a view to display on-screen. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Sonar > Down/Sonar Combo View
Sonar > Down/Side Combo View
Sonar > Down/Side/Sonar Combo View
For more information, see
the Sonar section.
For more information, see
the Side Imaging section.
For more information, see
the Sonar and Side Imaging sections.
85
Down Imaging Sonar
Chart > Chart/Down Combo View
Chart > Chart/Sonar/Down Combo View
For more information, see
Navigation Overview.
For more information, see
the Sonar and Navigation sections.
NOTE: The available views are determined by your control head model and the installed transducer. For a complete list of the
views available on your control head, press the MENU key twice, and select the Views tab. See each related section of the manual
(Views, Sonar, Side Imaging, Navigation Overview, etc.) for more information.
Down Imaging Sonar
86
UNDERSTAND THE DOWN IMAGING VIEW
The images you see on the Down Imaging display are produced using sonar technology. Each time the unit pings, a strip of data
representing all the echoes received by the transducer are put together on the display to form the image that you see. Like traditional
2D Sonar, the sonar history scrolls left across the screen.
Down Imaging beams “illuminate” the bottom contour, structure, and fish. The beams are wide (side to side) but very thin from front
to back.
Down Imaging View (HELIX 9 CHIRP DI GPS G2N)
white
streaks/clouds
light shades
shadow
dark shades
Sonar History — Historical returns scroll left across the view.
Use the light and dark parts of the display to interpret the objects under your boat as follows:
Dark shades represent soft returns (mud, sand) or descending terrain.
Light shades represent denser terrain (timber, rocks) or rising terrain. A very hard bottom may appear as white on the display.
White Streaks or Clouds may represent fish on the display.
Shadows are not caused by light but by the lack of a sonar return. Objects standing on the bottom cause a sonar shadow to
appear on the display. The longer the shadow, the taller the object. Fish may also cast shadows. You can use the shadow to
interpret where the fish or object is located in relation to the bottom.
87
Down Imaging Sonar
CUSTOMIZE THE DOWN IMAGING VIEW
You can customize the Down Imaging views by showing or hiding information, such as depth lines, temperature graph, and digital
readouts. You can also change the color palette.
Customizing the Down Imaging View
temperature
graph
digital
readouts set
to boxes
depth
lines
NOTE: Digital readouts can be displayed as an overlay, or they can be displayed in data boxes (see Views: Display Digital
Readouts).
Show/Hide Depth Lines
The depth lines show incremental marks between the upper and lower depth range. See Adjust Settings While you Fish for details.
The Depth Lines menu is shared with the Sonar View, so turning them on or off will affect the Sonar Views and the Down Imaging
Views.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Depth Lines.
3. Select On (show) or Off (hide).
Show/Hide the Temperature Graph
The temperature graph displays the temperature changes over the recent sonar history. A temperature input from the installed
transducer or temp/speed accessory is required to enable this feature. The Temperature Graph menu is shared with the Sonar
View, so turning it on or off will affect the Sonar Views and the Down Imaging Views.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Temperature Graph.
3. Select On (show) or Off (hide).
Down Imaging Sonar
88
Change the View Colors
The DI Colors menu changes the palette used to display sonar returns on the view.
Down Imaging View with Palette 10 Selected (DI Colors)
Change the Down Imaging Colors Palette
1. Down Imaging X-Press Menu: With a Down Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select DI Colors.
3. Select a palette.
89
Down Imaging Sonar
Show/Hide the Frequency Label
The Frequency Label displays the currently selected frequencies. See Set up Sonar.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Frequency Label.
3. Select On (show) or Off (hide).
Down Imaging View with the Frequency Label Turned On
selected display
frequency
Down Imaging Sonar
90
ADJUST SETTINGS WHILE YOU FISH
(DOWN IMAGING X-PRESS MENU)
The X-Press Menu provides menu options to adjust the sensitivity and range as you fish. You can also control how fast the sonar
history scrolls across the screen. The menus allow you to see more or less of the sonar returns from the transducer beams as you
adjust each setting. Also, you can use key shortcuts on the view.
Adjusting Settings from the Down Imaging X-Press Menu
upper range
lower range
chart speed
91
Down Imaging Sonar
Adjust Sensitivity
Sensitivity controls how much detail is shown on the view. You can adjust sensitivity from the X-Press Menu or the DI Enhance menu
(see Enhance the Down Imaging View). The sensitivity can also be adjusted using the +/− ZOOM keys.
Decrease the sensitivity to eliminate the clutter from the display that is sometimes present in murky or muddy water. When
operating in very clear water or greater depths, increase the sensitivity to see weaker returns.
Adjust the Sensitivity using the X-Press Menu
1. Down Imaging X-Press Menu: With a Down Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Down Sensitivity.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to increase or decrease the sensitivity.
Adjust the Sensitivity using the ZOOM Keys
If your control head includes +/-ZOOM keys, you can use them to adjust the sensitivity.
1. With a Sonar View displayed on-screen, press the +ZOOM key or −ZOOM key.
Adjusting the Sensitivity using the +/−ZOOM Keys
Increase Sensitivity
Down Imaging Sonar
Decrease Sensitivity
92
Enhance the Down Imaging View
The DI Enhance menu allows you to adjust the sensitivity, contrast, and sharpness on the Down Imaging View. As you adjust each
setting, the changes are displayed immediately on the view.
Enhancing the Down Imaging View
Enhance the Down Imaging View
1. Down Imaging X-Press Menu: With a Down Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select DI Enhance. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to select each menu and adjust the setting.
Sensitivity
Sensitivity controls how much detail is shown on the view. Decrease the sensitivity to eliminate
the clutter from the display that is sometimes present in murky or muddy water. When
operating in very clear water or greater depths, increase the sensitivity to see weaker returns
that may be of interest. This menu can also be adjusted from the Down Imaging X-Press Menu
(DI Sensitivity).
Contrast
Adjust the Contrast setting to accent the light and dark parts of the Down Imaging data to
provide greater definition. To intensify the strong returns, increase the contrast. To intensify
the weak returns, decrease the contrast.
Sharpness
Turn on sharpness and select a filter level to sharpen the edges of the Down Imaging data.
93
Down Imaging Sonar
Set the Upper/Lower Range
Upper Range and Lower Range control how much of the water column is displayed on the view. For example, if you are only interested
in the area between 20 and 50 feet deep, set the Upper Range to 20 and the Lower Range to 50. The view will not display sonar
returns outside of the set ranges, and greater detail for the selected range will be displayed.
1. Down Imaging X-Press Menu (Advanced User Mode): With a Down Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key
once.
2. Select Upper Range. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
3. Select Lower Range. Select Auto or set a specific depth (manual).
Auto: The Lower Range will be adjusted by the control head to follow the bottom automatically.
Manual : The control head locks onto the depth you select.
NOTE: There must be a difference of 10 feet between the upper and lower range settings.
Change the Chart Speed
Chart Speed controls how fast the sonar history moves across the view and how much detail is shown.
1. Down Imaging X-Press Menu: With a Down Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Chart Speed.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Change the DI Colors
The Down Imaging X-Press Menu allows you to quickly change the display palette while you fish. See Customize the Down Imaging
View: Change the View Colors for more information.
1. Down Imaging X-Press Menu: With a Down Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select DI Colors.
3. Select a palette.
Change the Imaging SwitchFire Mode
Imaging SwitchFire controls how the sonar returns are displayed in the Down Imaging and Side Imaging Views.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Imaging SwitchFire.
3. Select Clear Mode or Max Mode.
Clear Mode: Clutter is filtered, and sonar returns are interpreted to provide more details on-screen about the objects within
the transducer beam(s).
Max Mode: The view shows the most sonar information available within the transducer beam(s).
Down Imaging Sonar
94
Switch Frequencies
If the transducer includes more than one frequency for Down Imaging, use the CHECK/INFO key to quickly change the frequency used
in the Down Imaging View. For more information see Sonar Overview and Set up Sonar.
1. With a Down Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the CHECK/INFO key.
Using the CHECK key to Switch Frequencies (HELIX 9 CHIRP DI GPS G2N)
frequency
label
Switch Frequencies
95
Down Imaging Sonar
REVIEW DOWN IMAGING HISTORY AND ZOOM IN/OUT
In addition to adjusting the sonar settings while you fish, you can freeze the sonar history, magnify sonar returns, and review position
information.
Freeze the Down Imaging View
Press any arrow on the Cursor Control key, and the sonar history will freeze and the cursor will display on-screen. If you move the
cursor over a sonar return, digital readouts for the cursor position are displayed on the view.
1. Press any arrow on the Cursor Control key.
2. Move the cursor over a sonar return.
3. Review the cursor position and depth information in the digital readouts.
NOTE: To mark a waypoint or start navigation to the cursor position, see Navigation in Down Imaging Views.
Zoom In/Zoom Out using the X-Press Menu
If your control head does not include ZOOM keys, you will use the X-Press menu to magnify a selected part of the view.
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position on the view.
2. Press the MENU key once.
3. Select DI Zoom.
4. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
5. Close: Turn off DI Zoom.
Zoom In/Zoom Out using the ZOOM Keys
If your control head includes +/−ZOOM keys, use the instructions in this section to magnify the selected part of the view.
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position on the view.
2. Zoom In: Press the +ZOOM key.
Zoom Out: Press the −ZOOM key.
3. Close: Press the EXIT key.
Down Imaging Sonar
96
Zooming into the Down Imaging History
cursor depth
depth below cursor
distance to cursor position
cursor
digital
readouts
bearing to cursor position
zoom level
zoom box
can be
moved with
the Cursor
Control key
Move the Cursor
ZOOM In
97
ZOOM Out
Down Imaging Sonar
NAVIGATION IN DOWN IMAGING VIEWS
To mark waypoints and start navigation, the control head must have a GPS Fix from a connected or internal GPS receiver. See
Getting Started for more information.
Mark a Waypoint
You can mark a waypoint at the boat position or the cursor position. Waypoints are saved to the Waypoint Management dialog box
(see Manage your Navigation Data).
Mark a Waypoint at the Boat Position
1. Press the MARK key.
Mark a Waypoint at the Cursor Position
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position on the view.
2. Press the MARK key twice.
Marking a Waypoint at the Cursor Position
cursor depth
depth below cursor
distance to cursor position
cursor
digital
readouts
cursor
Press Twice to
Mark a Waypoint
Move the Cursor
Down Imaging Sonar
98
bearing to cursor position
Navigate to a Position
Use the instructions in this section to start navigation to a position in the view. See Navigation Overview for more information about
these features.
Navigate to the Cursor Position
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position on the view.
2. Press the GOTO key twice.
When you press the GOTO key, a waypoint will be marked at the cursor position.
Navigate to a Saved Position
If you press the GOTO key, you can choose to start navigation from a list of saved waypoints and routes.
1. Press the GOTO key.
2. Select Nav Data. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to select a saved waypoint or route.
4. Press the RIGHT Cursor key to start navigation.
Cancel Navigation
1. Press the MENU key once.
2. Select Cancel Navigation. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
99
Down Imaging Sonar
DISPLAY A SIDE IMAGING VIEW ON-SCREEN
(CHIRP SI, CHIRP MEGA SI ONLY)
There are a variety of views available to display Side Imaging data. You can also customize the view by showing or hiding information
(see Customize the Side Imaging View), and you can adjust the sonar settings to maximize the information displayed on-screen
(see Adjust Settings While you Fish). The changes you make are applied to all Side Imaging views.
Display a Side Imaging View
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select Sonar > Side Imaging View.
Side Imaging View
Display a Side Imaging Combo View
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. To open a Side Imaging Combo View, select Sonar.
To open a Chart Combo View (Side Imaging and Chart together), select Chart.
3. Select a view to display on-screen. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Sonar > Side/Side Combo View
Sonar > Side/Sonar Combo View
Sonar > Down/Side Combo View
For more information, see
Adjust Settings While you Fish: Display Beams.
For more information, see
the Sonar section.
For more information, see
the Down Imaging section.
Side Imaging Sonar
100
Sonar > Down/Side/Sonar Combo View
Chart > Chart/Side Combo View
Chart > Chart/Sonar/Side Combo View
For more information, see
the Sonar and Down Imaging sections.
For more information, see
Navigation Overview.
For more information, see
the Sonar and Navigation sections.
NOTE: The available views are determined by your control head model and the installed transducer. For a complete list of the
views available on your control head, press the MENU key twice, and select the Views tab. See each related section of the manual
(Views, Sonar, Down Imaging, Navigation Overview, etc.) for more information.
101
Side Imaging Sonar
UNDERSTAND THE SIDE IMAGING VIEW
Side Imaging beams “illuminate” the bottom contour, structure, and fish. The side beam coverage is very thin from front to back,
yet very wide from top to bottom. The bottom composition determines the intensity of the sonar return, and upward slopes that face
the transducer reflect sonar better than downward slopes that face away from the transducer.
For Best Side Imaging Performance
• Boat Speed: trolling
• Straight line navigation
• Minimum turning time and wave turbulence
Side Imaging View (CHIRP MEGA SI)
(HELIX 9 CHIRP SI GPS G2N)
boat icon
water column
light shades
Side Imaging sonar returns are first
displayed at the top of the screen, and
historical data scrolls down the display
as new information is received.
dark shades
white streaks
shadows
Use the light and dark parts of the display to interpret the objects on the view as follows:
Shadows: The longer the shadow, the taller the object. Fish also cast shadows, and their distance from the bottom can be
interpreted by their shadow.
Light Shades represent denser terrain (possibly compacted sediment, timber, rocks) or rising terrain.
Water Column: shows the relative depth of the water under the boat at any given time. Variations in the width of the water
column show variations in the distance to the bottom as the boat passes over. See the illustration Interpreting the Side
Imaging View.
White Streaks or Clouds may represent fish on the display.
Dark Shades represent soft returns (possibly sand or mud) or descending terrain.
Side Imaging Sonar
102
To visualize how Side Imaging works, the Side Imaging View illustration can be folded down the middle and then folded again at the
lowest point of the water column. The raised area reveals the water column with its relative depth of the water under the boat. In the
Side Imaging View, variations in the width of the water column show variations in the distance to the bottom as the boat passes over.
Side Imaging View
boat icon
water column
Interpreting the Side Imaging View
NOTE: See humminbird.com for tutorials and Side Imaging videos.
103
Side Imaging Sonar
CUSTOMIZE THE SIDE IMAGING VIEW
The settings in this section are optional. You can use the default settings for the view, or you can customize it with your preferences.
Showing Digital Readouts and SI Range Lines
range
numbers
digital readouts
set to boxes
range lines
Show/Hide SI Range Lines
SI Range Lines divide each side beam range into equal sections on the Side Imaging View. Use the range lines to estimate the
location of objects. You can show or hide range lines on the view.
NOTE: The range numbers are estimated and should not be used for measurement. If SI Range Lines and Contour Mode are turned
on, the SI Range Lines will remain on the display, but the individual range numbers will not be available.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select SI Range Lines.
3. Select On (show) or Off (hide).
Show/Hide Digital Readouts on the Side Imaging View
If you have Digital Readouts set to Boxes on all views, you can hide the digital readout boxes on the Side Imaging View exclusively.
For details, see Views: Display Digital Readouts.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select SI Readouts.
3. Select On (show) or Off (hide).
Side Imaging Sonar
104
Change the View Colors
The SI Colors menu changes the colors used to display sonar returns on the view.
1. Side Imaging X-Press Menu: With a Side Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select SI Colors.
3. Select a palette.
Side Imaging View with Palette 1 Displayed
105
Side Imaging Sonar
Show/Hide the Frequency Label
The Frequency Label displays the currently selected frequencies. See Set up Sonar.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Frequency Label.
3. Select On (show) or Off (hide).
Side Imaging View with the Frequency Label Turned On
selected display
frequency
Side Imaging Sonar
106
ADJUST SETTINGS WHILE YOU FISH
(SIDE IMAGING X-PRESS MENU)
The X-Press Menu provides menu options to adjust the sensitivity and range as you fish. You can also control how fast the sonar
history scrolls down the screen. The menu options allow you to see more or less of the sonar returns from the transducer beams
as you adjust each setting. Also, you can use key shortcuts on the view.
Adjust Sensitivity
Sensitivity controls how much detail is shown on the view. You can adjust sensitivity from the X-Press Menu or the Enhance menu
(see Enhance the Side Imaging View). The sensitivity can also be adjusted using the +/− ZOOM keys.
Decrease the sensitivity to eliminate the clutter from the display that is sometimes present in murky or muddy water. When
operating in very clear water or greater depths, increase the sensitivity to see weaker returns.
Adjust the Sensitivity using the X-Press Menu
1. Side Imaging X-Press Menu: With a Side Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select SI Sensitivity.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to increase or decrease the sensitivity.
Adjust the Sensitivity using the ZOOM Keys
If your control head includes +/−ZOOM keys, you can use them to adjust the sensitivity.
1. With a Sonar View displayed on-screen, press the +ZOOM key or −ZOOM key.
107
Side Imaging Sonar
Adjusting the Sensitivity using the +/−ZOOM Keys
Increase Sensitivity
Side Imaging Sonar
Decrease Sensitivity
108
Enhance the Side Imaging View
The SI Enhance menu allows you to adjust the sensitivity, contrast, and sharpness on the Side Imaging View. As you adjust each
setting, the changes are displayed immediately on the view, so you can fine tune the display. You can also turn on/off the Contour
Mode from this menu so the water column is displayed or hidden on the view.
Enhancing the Side Imaging View
Enhance the Side Imaging View
1. Side Imaging X-Press Menu: With a Side Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select SI Enhance. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to select each menu and adjust the setting.
109
Side Imaging Sonar
Sensitivity
Sensitivity controls how much detail is shown on the view. Decrease the sensitivity to eliminate
the clutter from the display that is sometimes present in murky or muddy water. When
operating in very clear water or greater depths, increase the sensitivity to see weaker returns
that may be of interest. This menu can also be adjusted from the Side Imaging X-Press Menu
(SI Sensitivity).
Contrast
Adjust the Contrast setting to accent the light and dark parts of the Side Imaging data to
provide greater definition. To intensify the strong returns, increase the contrast. To intensify
the weak returns, decrease the contrast.
Sharpness
Turn on sharpness and select a filter level to sharpen the edges of the Side Imaging data.
Contour Mode controls how the water column is displayed in the Side Imaging Views. When
Contour Mode is turned off, the water column is displayed on the view. The location of a target
on the display is based on the slant range to the target.
Contour Mode
When Contour Mode is turned on, the bottom is graphed at a constant point on the display,
regardless of changes in depth. The Side Imaging beams are divided by a vertical line. The
water column is removed from the view, which allows the display to show targets at their linear
horizontal distance. The location of a target may be easier to interpret when the water column
is removed.
Contour Mode Off
Contour Mode On
The water column is displayed on the Side Imaging View.
The water column is removed from the Side Imaging View.
Side Imaging Sonar
110
Adjust the Side Imaging Range
SI Range sets the deepest range that will be displayed on the Side Imaging views. Choose a low range number to focus on a shorter
distance of the water column and see greater detail on the view. Choose a higher range number to see farther into the water and
see an overview of details on the screen.
1. Side Imaging X-Press Menu: With a Side Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select SI Range.
Auto: The Range will be adjusted by the control head to follow the bottom automatically.
Manual: The control head locks onto the depth you select.
Side Imaging units default to the Side Imaging range setting if the SI Range is set deeper than the Max Depth. See Set up Sonar
for more information.
Display Beams
Use SI Side to select which Side Imaging beam will be shown on the display.
Side Imaging View with the Left Beam Displayed
boat icon
left beam
label
range lines
Select Beams to Display on the View
1. Side Imaging X-Press Menu: With a Side Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select SI Side.
3. Select a beam or both beams to display.
111
Side Imaging Sonar
Select Beams to Display on the Side/Side Combo View
Use the Side/Side Combo View to focus on each side or one side.
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select Sonar > Side/Side Combo View.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. X-Press Menu: Press the MENU key once.
5. Select Active Pane.
6. Select Upper or Lower.
7. Select SI Side.
8. Select a beam or both beams to display.
Selecting Both Beams for the Upper Active Pane
Side Imaging Sonar
Side/Side Combo View (CHIRP MEGA SI)
112
Change the Chart Speed
Chart Speed controls how fast the sonar history moves down the view and how much detail is shown.
1. Side Imaging X-Press Menu: With a Side Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Chart Speed.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Change the View Colors
The Side Imaging X-Press Menu allows you to quickly change the display palette while you fish. See Customize the Side Imaging
View: Change the View Colors for more information.
1. Side Imaging X-Press Menu: With a Side Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select SI Colors.
3. Select a palette.
Change the Imaging SwitchFire Mode
Imaging SwitchFire controls how the sonar returns are displayed in the Down Imaging and Side Imaging Views.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Imaging SwitchFire.
3. Select Clear Mode or Max Mode.
Clear Mode: Clutter is filtered, and sonar returns are interpreted to provide more details on-screen about the objects within
the transducer beam(s).
Max Mode: The view shows the most sonar information available within the transducer beam(s).
113
Side Imaging Sonar
Switch Frequencies (CHIRP MEGA SI models only)
If the transducer includes more than one Side Imaging frequency, use the CHECK/INFO key to quickly change the frequency used
in the Side Imaging View. For more information see Sonar Overview and Set up Sonar.
1. With a Side Imaging View displayed on-screen, press the CHECK/INFO key.
Using the CHECK key to Switch Frequencies (CHIRP MEGA SI)
(HELIX 9 CHIRP SI GPS G2N)
frequency
label
Switch Frequencies
Side Imaging Sonar
114
REVIEW SIDE IMAGING HISTORY AND ZOOM IN/OUT
In addition to adjusting the sonar settings while you fish, you can freeze the sonar history, magnify sonar returns, and review position
information.
Freeze the Side Imaging View
Press any arrow on the Cursor Control key, and the sonar history will freeze and the cursor will display on-screen. If you move the
cursor over a sonar return, digital readouts for the cursor position are displayed on the view.
1. Press any arrow on the Cursor Control key.
2. Move the cursor over a sonar return.
3. Review the cursor position and depth information in the digital readouts.
NOTE: To mark a waypoint or start navigation to the cursor position, see Navigation in Side Imaging Views.
Zoom In/Zoom Out
To take a closer look, use the ZOOM keys to magnify the selected part of the view.
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position on the view.
2. Zoom In: Press the +ZOOM key.
Zoom Out: Press the -ZOOM key.
3. Close: Press the EXIT key.
115
Side Imaging Sonar
Zooming In/Out
cursor depth
depth below cursor
distance to cursor position
cursor
digital
readouts
zoom level
zoom box
can be
moved with
the Cursor
Control key
Move the Cursor
Side Imaging Sonar
bearing to cursor position
ZOOM In
116
ZOOM Out
NAVIGATION IN SIDE IMAGING VIEWS
To mark waypoints and start navigation, the control head must have a GPS Fix from a connected or internal GPS receiver. See
Getting Started for more information.
Turn on/off SI Navigation
SI Navigation controls how the boat icon is displayed in Side Imaging Views. See Navigate to a Position for more information. If
SI Navigation is turned on, an arrow icon indicates the direction the boat needs to turn to reach the next waypoint during navigation.
If SI Navigation is turned off, the boat icon will not change during navigation although you can still mark waypoints and start
navigation from a Side Imaging View.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select SI Navigation.
3. Select On or Off.
Mark a Waypoint
You can mark a waypoint at the boat position or the cursor position. Waypoints are saved to the Waypoint Management dialog box
(see Manage your Navigation Data).
Mark a Waypoint at the Boat Position
1. Press the MARK key.
Mark a Waypoint at the Cursor Position
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position on the view.
2. Press the MARK key twice.
Navigate to a Position
Use the instructions in this section to start navigation to a position in the view. See Navigation Overview for more information about
these features.
Navigate to the Cursor Position
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position on the view.
2. Press the GOTO key twice.
When you press the GOTO key, a waypoint will be marked at the cursor position.
Navigate to a Saved Position
If you press the GOTO key, you can choose to start navigation from a list of saved waypoints and routes.
1. Press the GOTO key.
2. Select Nav Data. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to select a saved waypoint or route.
4. Press the RIGHT Cursor key to start navigation.
117
Side Imaging Sonar
Navigating to a Waypoint
direction to turn the boat to reach the next waypoint (SI Navigation On)
navigation
digital
readouts
next waypoint
Press Twice to
Start Navigation
Move the Cursor
Cancel Navigation
1. Press the MENU key once.
2. Select Cancel Navigation. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Side Imaging Sonar
118
MANAGE SCREEN SNAPSHOTS AND RECORDINGS
Snapshot and Recording View displays the saved screen snapshots and recordings from the installed microSD or SD card (separate
purchase required). Use this view to review the snapshot and recording file details, start recording, and adjust the recording settings.
NOTE: Also, this feature can be helpful in troubleshooting any sonar-related issues. If you contact Humminbird Customer Service
for sonar troubleshooting assistance, you may be asked to perform one of the tasks in this section. See Email Files to Customer
Service for details.
Display the Snapshot and Recording View
To view the saved screen snapshots from the installed microSD or SD Card, open the Snapshot and Recording View. If Screen
Snapshot Waypoint is turned on when the screen snapshot is taken, you can view the saved file from Chart View.
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select System > Snapshot and Recording View.
Snapshot and Recording View
Enable Screen Snapshot and Recording
To enable Screen Snapshot and Recording, a microSD or SD card must be installed in the control head. See HELIX Control Head for
more information. If Screen Snapshot Waypoint is turned on, a waypoint will also be saved at the boat or cursor location when you
take a screen snapshot. The waypoint is saved with the same file name as the screen snapshot.
CAUTION! On the microSD or SD card, you will see that a DAT (or a .TXT) file is created for every .PNG screen snapshot. This data
file is required for viewing the screen snapshots from your control head, so don’t delete these files.
Enable Screen Snapshot and Recording
1. Install a microSD or SD card into the control head card slot. See HELIX Control Head for compatibility details.
Enable Marking a Waypoint with each Screen Snapshot
If Screen Snapshot Waypoint is turned on, a waypoint will also be saved at the boat or cursor location when you take a screen
snapshot. The waypoint is saved with the same file name as the screen snapshot.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Accessories tab.
2. Select Screen Snapshot Waypoint.
3. Select On.
119
Screen Snapshots and Recordings
Take Screen Snapshots
Screen Snapshots are saved pictures of the view on the screen. The screen snapshot will include the menus, dialog boxes, warnings,
and messages that were active when the screen snapshot was taken. If Screen Snapshot Waypoint is turned on, a waypoint will also
be saved at the boat or cursor location when you take a screen snapshot.
NOTE: A microSD or SD card must be installed in the control head to use the Snapshot and Recording features. See HELIX Control
Head for compatibility details.
1. From any view or cursor location you want to capture, press and hold the MARK key.
Taking a Screen Snapshot
Press and Hold to
Take a Screen Snapshot
Screen Snapshots and Recordings
120
Manage Saved Screen Snapshots
Saved Screen Snapshots can be viewed from the Snapshot and Recording View. If Screen Snapshot Waypoint is turned on when the
screen snapshot is taken, you can view the saved file from the Chart View.
NOTE: A microSD or SD card must be installed in the control head to use the Snapshot and Recording features. See HELIX Control
Head for compatibility details.
Display a Saved Screen Snapshot from Snapshot and Recording View
1. Display the Snapshot and Recording View on-screen.
2. Select a Snapshot: Press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys to scroll through the saved files.
3. Display: Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Close: Press the LEFT Cursor key.
Snapshot and Recording View
saved
screen
snapshot
(selected
file)
selected file
summary
scroll bar
saved
recording
microSD or
SD card
storage
(yellow =
used space)
Scroll through the List
Display
121
Screen Snapshots and Recordings
Display a Saved Screen Snapshot from Chart View
If Screen Snapshot Waypoint is turned on when the screen snapshot is taken, you can view the saved file from the Chart View (see
Enable Marking a Waypoint with each Screen Snapshot).
1. Display a Chart View on-screen.
2. Select a Snapshot: Use the Cursor key to select a screen snapshot icon.
3. Display: Press the CHECK/INFO key.
Selecting a Screen Snapshot in Chart View
screen
snapshot
icon
selected
thumbnail
preview
4. Close: Press the EXIT key.
Delete a Screen Snapshot
1. Display the Snapshot and Recording View on-screen.
2. Select a Snapshot: Press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys to scroll through the saved files.
3. Press the MENU key.
4. Select Delete Image. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Delete all Screen Snapshots
1. Display the Snapshot and Recording View on-screen.
2. Press the MENU key.
3. Select Delete All Images. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Screen Snapshots and Recordings
122
Record and Playback
The Recording feature records active sonar information. When the recording is played back, the views that were active during the
recording are available in Playback. You can play a saved recording from the Snapshot and Recording View.
NOTE: A microSD or SD card must be installed in the control head to use the Snapshot and Recording features. See HELIX Control
Head for compatibility details.
Start Recording
1. Display the Snapshot and Recording View on-screen.
2. Press the MENU key.
3. Select Start Recording. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
File Name: A waypoint will also be created at the boat location, and the recording shares the same file name as the waypoint
(.SON).
Use Different Views: To use different views on the control head and continue recording, press the EXIT key.
Not Available: Taking screen snapshots and playback mode are not available during recording.
Adjust Pings Per Second
For maximum performance during recording, keep the Pings per Second setting on Auto. If there is limited memory on the installed
microSD or SD card, use Pings Per Second to slow the ping rate. However, the recording will capture less sonar detail at a slower
ping rate.
1. Display the Snapshot and Recording View on-screen.
2. Press the MENU key.
3. Select Pings Per Second.
4. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Stop Recording
1. X-Press Menu: From any view, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Stop Recording. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
123
Screen Snapshots and Recordings
Play a Recording
1. Display the Snapshot and Recording View on-screen.
2. Select a Recording: Press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys to scroll through the saved files.
3. Start Playback: Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Navigation is cancelled during playback.
Use Different Views: To use different views on the control head and continue playback, press the EXIT key.
Adjust Sonar: Use the X-Press Menu to adjust sonar settings during playback. You can also use the cursor.
Mark Waypoints: Press the MARK key to mark waypoints during playback.
Selecting a Recording to Play
saved
recording
(selected
file)
selected
recording
summary
selected
recording
size
Start Playback
Screen Snapshots and Recordings
124
Adjust Playback Speed
1. X-Press Menu: From any view, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Playback Speed.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT keys to adjust playback speed or pause.
Adjusting the Playback Speed
Side Imaging
recording playing
indicates Playback
is in progress
Stop Playback
1. X-Press Menu: From any view, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Stop Playback. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Delete a Recording
1. Display the Snapshot and Recording View on-screen.
2. Select a Recording: Press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys to scroll through the saved files.
3. Press the MENU key.
4. Select Delete Recording. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Delete all Saved Recordings
1. Display the Snapshot and Recording View on-screen.
2. Press the MENU key.
3. Select Delete All Recordings. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
125
Screen Snapshots and Recordings
Email Files to Customer Service
If you’re working with Humminbird Customer Service to troubleshoot a sonar-related issue, they may ask you to send a screen
snapshot or recording to them for review. Use the instructions in this section to email a saved screen snapshot or recording to
Humminbird Customer Service. For more information, see humminbird.com.
Email a Saved Screen Snapshot
1. Install the SD or microSD card (and adapter) with the saved screen snapshots and recordings into your personal computer.
CAUTION! On the microSD or SD card, you will see that a DAT (or a .TXT) file is created for every .PNG screen snapshot. This data
file is required for viewing the screen snapshots from your control head, so don’t delete these files. See HELIX Control Head for
compatibility details.
2. Open your email account and compose a new message.
If Customer Service has provided a customer number, include it in the subject line.
3. Attach the screen snapshot files to the message. For each screen snapshot, attach the Sxxxxx.PNG file.
Folder: Screen Snapshots are saved in the SNAPSHOT folder on the microSD or SD card.
File Names: The .PNG file and .DAT file for each screen snapshot have the same name. Unless you have edited the name,
screen snapshots start with S.
4. Repeat step 3 for each screen snapshot.
5. Send the email to Humminbird Customer Service.
NOTE: If the attached files are large, you may need to use win-zip or a similar program to compress the files and send them via email.
Email a Saved Recording
1. Install the microSD or SD card adapter with the saved screen snapshots and recordings into your personal computer.
CAUTION! On the microSD or SD card, you will see that a DAT (or a .TXT) file is created for every recording folder. This data file is
required for viewing the recordings on your control head, so don’t delete these files. See HELIX Control Head for compatibility
details.
2. Open your email account and compose a new message.
If Customer Service has provided a service number, include it in the subject line.
3. Attach the Rxxxxx.DAT file for the recording to the message.
Folder: Recordings are saved in the RECORD folder on the microSD or SD card.
4. Attach all the files in the Rxxxxx folder to the message. Open the RECORD folder, and open the folder with the Recording
name.
Folder: Recordings are saved in the RECORD folder on the microSD or SD card. Unless you have edited the name, recordings
start with R. Open the Rxxxxx folder for the recording. For example, to send the files for the R00001 recording, open the
R00001 folder.
File Names: Attach all the .SON files and .IDX files in the recording folder.
5. Repeat step 3 and 4 for each recording.
6. Send the email to Humminbird Customer Service.
NOTE: If the attached files are large, you may need to use win-zip or a similar program to compress the files and send them via email.
Screen Snapshots and Recordings
126
CHART OVERVIEW
To enable the chart and navigation features, the control head must have a GPS Fix from an internal or external GPS receiver (see
Getting Started to check the sensor reception). Some of these features also require a compass/heading sensor to be connected
to the control head.
The selected map source also influences the menu system. When you change the map source, the menu options for the chart views
change, allowing you to add navigation data, shading, or alarms. See Select a Map Source for details.
Chart View
land
course
projection
line
map scale
boat icon
water
north up
indicator
chart
orientation
When the boat is stationary, it is drawn as a circle.
When the boat is in motion, it changes to a boat shape, pointed in the direction of motion.
127
Chart Overview
DISPLAY A CHART VIEW ON-SCREEN
There are a variety of views available to display charts and navigation. The views can be customized and displayed as a Combo View.
Display a Chart View or Bird’s Eye View
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select Chart > Chart View or Chart Instrument View.
OR
Select Chart > Bird’s Eye View.
Chart View
Chart Overview
Chart Instrument View
Bird’s Eye View
For more information, see
Customize the Chart Instrument View.
For more information, see
Customize the Bird’s Eye View.
128
Display a Chart Combo View
You can select a variety of Chart Combo Views or Chart/Sonar Combo Views.
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select Chart.
3. Select a view to display on-screen. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Chart > Chart/Bird’s Eye Combo View
Chart > Chart/Chart Combo View
For more information, see
Customize the Bird’s Eye View.
Chart > Chart/BE Instrument View
For more information, see
Customize the Chart Instrument View and
Customize the Bird’s Eye View.
Chart > Chart/Sonar Combo View
Chart > Chart/Down Combo View
For more information, see the
Sonar section.
For more information, see the
Down Imaging section.
Chart > Chart/Side Combo View
Chart > Chart/Sonar/Down Combo View
Chart > Chart/Sonar/Side Combo View
For more information, see the
Side Imaging section.
For more information, see the
Sonar and Down Imaging sections.
For more information, see the
Sonar and Side Imaging sections.
NOTE: The available views are determined by your control head model and the installed transducer. For a complete list of the
views available on your control head, press the MENU key twice, and select the Views tab. See each related section of the manual
(Views, Sonar, Side Imaging, Navigation Overview, etc.) for more information.
129
Chart Overview
SELECT A MAP SOURCE
The HELIX control head includes a built-in map. You can also install a microSD or SD map card with additional chart information
for a particular location (separate purchase required). See HELIX Control Head for compatibility details.
When you install a microSD or SD map card, the control head automatically chooses the best map to display. You can also change
the map source manually. If your control head has two cards installed, you can choose which map source you want to use (HELIX
9, 10, 12 only).
Install a microSD or SD Map Card
1. Install a microSD or SD map card into the control head card slot. See HELIX Control Head for compatibility details.
NOTE: Do not leave the card slot cover open. The slot cover should always be closed to prevent water damage to the unit.
Change the Map Source
When you install a microSD or SD map card, the map source is changed automatically to match the microSD or SD map card map
source. You can also change the map source manually.
When you change the map source, the menus for the chart views also change, allowing you to add navigation data, shading, alarms,
and more.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Map Source.
3. Select the installed map card location or a built-in map.
Auto: The best available map will be selected automatically.
Change Map Options
Change the Map Coordinate System (optional)
Use Map Datum to change the map coordinate system used by the control head to match those of a paper map. Almost all electronic
charts use the WGS84 Map Datum and most likely do not require a setting change. (Default = WGS84)
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Map Datum.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to change the setting.
Apply an Offset to the Map (optional)
Use Set Map Offset to move the chart position on-screen and correct a position error in the cartography. This setting applies to all
charts, not just the chart that requires correction.
NOTE: This feature is not available with Humminbird LakeMaster map cards.
1. Display a Chart View on-screen.
2. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to the position where the map offset will be applied.
3. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
4. Select Set Map Offset.
Chart Overview
130
5. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
6. Follow the on-screen prompts.
Clear Map Offset: Select Main Menu (Advanced User Mode) > Chart tab > Clear Map Offset.
Select a New Map (optional)
If the installed map card includes additional maps, use the following instructions to display map borders and select a different map.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Map Borders.
3. Select MMC/SD Only or All Visible.
4. Display a Chart View on-screen.
5. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor within the dotted lines of a map border.
6. Press the +ZOOM key repeatedly to display the map details.
See Customize the Chart View: Customize the Chart Detail Level.
Change the Simulation Position (optional)
Simulator mode allows you to save menu settings and navigation data while you learn to use your control head. To start simulation
mode, see Getting Started. To change the simulation position shown on the Chart View, use the following instructions.
Simulation mode is not intended for on the water use. If you are on the water, use Normal mode. See Getting Started for details.
1. Display a Chart View on-screen.
2. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position on the view.
3. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
4. Select Set Simulation Position.
5. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
The boat icon will move to the new position.
Clear the Track: Press the MENU key once. Select Clear Current Track.
131
Chart Overview
Set up Humminbird ChartSelect
ChartSelect allows you to purchase a Humminbird chart online and download it to a blank microSD or SD Card. Visit
chartselect.humminbird.com for more information and to download the ChartSelect and FishSmart User Guide.
Encrypt a microSD or SD Card
Use the Encrypt SD Card menu to prepare a blank microSD or SD card for ChartSelect. See HELIX Control Head for compatibility
details.
WARNING! Do not use this menu with a microSD or SD map card installed. You must use a blank microSD or SD card with this
menu. See the ChartSelect and FishSmart User Guide before proceeding.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select Encrypt SD Card.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Chart Overview
132
Set up Humminbird LakeMaster
When a Humminbird LakeMaster map card is installed and selected as the map source, additional menus are added to the menu
system. The menu options are determined by the map card you purchased.
Compatible Map Sources: Humminbird LakeMaster, LakeMaster PLUS, ZeroLine Map Card, AUTOCHART PC, etc. Visit our Web site
at humminbird.com for compatibility details and updates.
NOTE: A Humminbird LakeMaster map card must be installed and selected as the map source to enable this feature (see Change
the Map Source).
Set the Water Level Offset
When you start your trip for the day, it is important to note if the water level is higher or lower than normal. For example, if you know
the lake is down 3 feet, set the Water Level Offset to -3.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the HB Chart tab.
2. Select Water Level Offset.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
If the water level is higher than normal, set a (+) positive amount.
If the water level is lower than normal, set a (-) negative amount.
If the water level has not changed (normal), set Water Level Offset to (0) zero.
Water Level Offset (Set to 0 = Off)
Water Level Offset Adjusted to -4
If the water is lower than normal, set the Water Level Offset to a negative
number, and the land will extend visually on the map (as shown above). If the
water is higher than normal, set the Water Level Offset to a (+) positive amount,
and the water line will extend visually on the map.
NOTE: For additional LakeMaster map card menus, see Display Humminbird LakeMaster Contour Lines and Depth Ranges in this
manual. For additional features related to your LakeMaster map card, visit our Web site at humminbird.com to download the
accessory guide.
133
Chart Overview
Set up Navionics
When a Navionics map card is installed and selected as the map source, additional menus are added to the menu system. The
menu options are determined by the map card you purchased, and they are available in the Chart tab (see Customize the Chart View)
and/or the Platinum tab.
Compatible Map Sources: Navionics+, Navionics Gold, HotMaps, HotMaps Premium, and Platinum+. Visit our Web site at
humminbird.com for compatibility details and updates.
Selecting the Navionics Platinum Tab
Platinum tab
NOTE: A Navionics map card must be installed and selected as the map source to enable these features (see Change the Map
Source). For details and additional features related to your Navionics map card, see your Navionics map card user guide.
Chart Overview
134
CUSTOMIZE THE BIRD’S EYE VIEW
Navaids on Bird’s Eye View allows you to add navigational aids to the Bird’s Eye View, such as lights or buoys. The available settings
are determined by the installed map card and the selected map source.
Chart/Bird’s Eye Combo View
Bird’s Eye View
Chart View
3D view
outline set
to visible
off course
limits
navaids set
to visible
boat icon
route
off course
limits
boat icon
waypoint
Show/Hide Navaids
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Navaids on Bird’s Eye View.
3. Select Visible or Hidden.
Show/Hide the Bird’s Eye Outline
If you use the Chart/Bird’s Eye View, you can display a line on the Chart View that shows the portion of the view that is used in the
Bird’s Eye View.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select 3D View Outline.
3. Select Visible or Hidden.
135
Customize the Bird’s Eye View
CUSTOMIZE THE CHART INSTRUMENT VIEW
The Chart Instrument View displays a digital compass and XTE (Cross Track Error) graphic on the Chart View. If a compass is not
installed, the COG (Course Over Ground) provides the data source for the digital compass.
The Chart Instrument View shares the same menu settings as the Chart View. For customization information, see Customize the
Chart View.
Chart Instrument View
digital compass (COG or connected compass)
cursor
digital
readouts
map scale
digital
readouts set
to overlay
north up
indicator
XTE (cross track error)
NOTE: Digital readouts can be displayed as an overlay, or they can be displayed in data boxes (see Views: Display Digital
Readouts).
Customize the Chart Instrument View
136
CUSTOMIZE THE CHART VIEW
The settings in this section are optional. You can use the default settings for the chart appearance and map source, or you can
customize the Chart View.
Customizing the Chart View
course projection line set to COG/SOG
latitude
line
shaded
depth
digital
readouts set
to boxes
north up
indicator
longitude line
chart
orientation
NOTE: Digital readouts can be displayed as an overlay, or they can be displayed in data boxes (see Views: Display Digital
Readouts).
Change the Background Color
The Background menu changes the color of the background on the view. This menu also changes the background color for the
Bird’s Eye View.
1. Press the POWER key.
2. Select Background.
3. Select a color.
Show/Hide the North Up Indicator Icon
The North Up Indicator displays the direction of True North. The icon also displays the chart orientation, and it will change as the
orientation and the data source change. To set the Chart Orientation, see Change the Chart Orientation and Motion Mode.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select North Up Indicator.
3. Select Off (hidden) or On (visible).
137
Customize the Chart View
Show/Hide the Course Projection Line
The course projection line is an arrow or line extending from the bow of the boat icon. It projects the current course and shows where
the boat will go if you continue on your present course.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Course Projection Line.
3. Select a display setting.
Hidden
The Course Projection line will not be displayed.
Standard
arrow
Single Vector
line
COG/SOG
A line with tick marks will be displayed at set intervals from the boat. The tick marks are based
on the speed calculation.
Show/Hide Latitude/Longitude Lines
Use the following instructions to show or hide latitude and longitude lines on the Chart View.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Lat/Lon Grid.
3. Select Visible or Hidden.
Adjust the Depth Shading
Shaded Depth allows you to change the depth used for shading on the Chart View. The available settings are determined by the
installed map card and selected map source.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Shaded Depth.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Customize the Chart View
138
Customize the Chart Detail Level
Use the following instructions to add or hide chart details and navaids on the Chart View and the Bird’s Eye View.
Navionics Chart Displayed with Chart Detail set to Navigation
navaid
map scale
chart info
map border
(dotted
black line)
restricted area
(dashed red lines)
Select a Chart Detail Level
Chart Detail Level allows you to add details and layers to the chart views. The available settings are determined by the installed
map card and selected map source.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Chart Detail Level.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select one of the following:
Basic
shows land areas, ports, obstructions, and restricted areas
Navigation
In addition to the Basic level, Navigation shows navaids, landmarks, ferryways, and navigation
routes.
Underwater
In addition to the Basic and Navigation information, Underwater shows depth contours, fishing
areas, underwater wrecks, tides, and currents.
Custom
(Advanced User
Mode)
Select Custom to select specific chart detail layers. You can show or hide chart layers such as
navigation canals, boundaries, restricted areas, coastline, bridges, and more. See Select Custom
Chart Layers.
139
Customize the Chart View
Select Custom Chart Layers
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Chart Detail Level.
3. Select Custom.
4. Press the DOWN Cursor key.
5. Select Custom Chart Layers. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
6. Use the Cursor key to select a layer and turn it on (visible) or off (hidden).
Simplify the Chart Detail Level
Use Chart Declutter to remove all chart layers except for land outlines, waypoints, routes, and tracks. The chart will clear for 10
seconds, and then it will refresh to its previous display settings.
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Chart Declutter.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Show/Hide Map Borders
The dotted lines of a map border indicate an area that contains a different map. See Select a Map Source: Select a New Map for
details. The available settings are determined by the installed map card and selected map source.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Map Borders.
3. Select Hidden, MMC/SD only, or All Visible.
Show/Hide Spot Soundings
Spot Soundings are depth measurements shown on the chart. The available settings are determined by the installed map card
and selected map source.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Spot Soundings.
3. Select Visible or Hidden.
Increase the Text Size
Turn on Easy View Text to increase the size of the text displayed on the chart view. The available settings are determined by the
installed map card and selected map source.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Easy View Text.
3. Select On or Off.
Customize the Chart View
140
DISPLAY HUMMINBIRD LAKEMASTER CONTOUR LINES AND DEPTH RANGES
When you install a LakeMaster Map Card or LakeMaster PLUS Map Card, menu options are added to the HB Chart Menu tab. You can
display or hide contour lines, highlight shallow water, and highlight a depth range on the map.
NOTE: A Humminbird LakeMaster map card must be installed and selected as the map source to enable these features. For details
and additional features related to your LakeMaster map card, visit our Web site at humminbird.com to download the accessory
guide.
Adjusting the LakeMaster Display Settings
depth
highlight &
depth
highlight
range
(green)
shallow
water
highlight
(red)
depth colors
contour line
depth label
(depth of
contour)
See More of Contour Lines
and Depth Colors
141
Customize the Chart View
Show/Hide Contour Lines
Display or hide the water contour lines in the Chart View. This feature is also affected by the Water Level Offset setting. See Select
a Map Source: Set up Humminbird LakeMaster.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the HB Chart tab.
2. Select Contour Lines.
3. Select Hidden or Visible.
Turn on Depth Colors
Set the depth shading in the Chart View to Off or shaded.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the HB Chart tab.
2. Select Depth Colors.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Highlight a Depth Range
Depth Highlight allows you to identify a depth in the Chart View. You can also adjust the range on each side of the depth using Depth
Highlight Range. The depth range you set is highlighted in green on the chart.
For example, if you know a certain fish is holding at 18 to 20 feet, you can set the Depth Highlight to 19 feet and the Depth Highlight
Range to +/- 1 foot. The view will show a green band from 18 to 20 feet.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the HB Chart tab.
2. Select Depth Highlight.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a depth.
4. To highlight the range on both sides of the selected depth, press the DOWN Cursor key. Select Depth Highlight Range.
5. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a range.
Highlight a Shallow Water Range
When the depth is equal to or less than the amount you set, it will be highlighted in red on the Chart View.
For example, if your boat has a draft of 3 feet, set the Shallow Water Highlight to 3 feet, and a red band from 0 to 3 feet will be shown
on the map.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the HB Chart tab.
2. Select Shallow Water Highlight.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a depth.
Customize the Chart View
142
CHANGE THE CHART ORIENTATION AND MOTION MODE
The Chart View pans automatically so the boat is always centered on the view. The settings in this section allow you to change the
chart orientation, zoom the view automatically, set the north reference, and see more or less of the view based on the speed or range
setting.
Set the Chart Orientation
Chart Orientation set to Course Up
north up
indicator
chart orientation
Set the Chart Orientation
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Chart Orientation.
3. Select an orientation to apply to the chart.
North-Up
The chart is oriented with North up on the display, and the boat rotates according to
its heading or COG (Course Over Ground).
Head-Up
(compass or GPS required)
The boat’s current heading points up, and the chart rotates around the boat icon so
that it always points up on the view. The heading is provided by the connected
compass/heading sensor. If a compass is not connected, the boat will be oriented
according to COG (Course Over Ground).
Course-up
During navigation, the intended course or route leg is shown at the top of the view.
Objects ahead of the boat are drawn above the boat. When the boat is not navigating,
the current heading is displayed.
NOTE: The North Up Indicator will change as the orientation and data source change. To display the North Up Indicator, see
Customize the Chart View.
143
Change the Chart Orientation and Motion Mode
Set the Bearing North Reference
North Reference allows you to have the bearing displayed as True North or Magnetic North.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select North Reference.
3. Select True North or Magnetic North.
Turn on/off Auto Zoom
Turn on Auto Zoom to zoom the Chart View automatically based on the speed of the boat. As the boat’s speed increases, the chart
range will increase.
NOTE: The settings in this section do not apply to the Bird’s Eye View.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Auto Zoom.
3. Select On or Off.
Zoom In/Out: If Auto Zoom is turned on, you can press the +/– ZOOM keys to see more or less of the view, and Auto Zoom will
resume after 20 seconds. To use only the +/– ZOOM keys to adjust the chart range, turn off Auto Zoom.
Turn on/off Auto Range
Turn on Auto Range to set the chart scale to the lowest range so that only the boat icon and the next waypoint in the route are shown.
If Auto Range is turned on, Auto Zoom will be turned off.
NOTE: The settings in this section do not apply to the Bird’s Eye View.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Auto Range.
3. Select On or Off.
Zoom In/Out: If Auto Range is turned on, you can press the +/– ZOOM keys to see more or less of the view, and Auto Range will
pause. To resume using Auto Range, press and hold the +/- ZOOM keys.
Turn on Vessel Offset
Vessel Offset allows you to see more of the Chart View based on the speed of the boat. Vessel Offset works with Offset Speed. When
the boat is moving below the Offset Speed setting, the boat icon will be displayed in the center of the view. When the boat is moving
at or above the Offset Speed setting, the boat icon will move to the edge of the view so more of the Chart View is shown.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Vessel Offset.
3. Select On.
4. Select Offset Speed.
5. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Change the Chart Orientation and Motion Mode
144
NAVIGATION OVERVIEW
Your Humminbird control head allows you to mark waypoints, create a route, and start navigating. Waypoints, routes, and tracks can
be managed on-screen so you can save your favorites, edit names, and easily return to your favorite destinations.
There are many ways to start navigation or edit navigation data with your Humminbird control head. The instructions in this section
review navigation features on the chart views. To use navigation features from the Waypoint Management dialog box, see Manage
your Navigation Data.
Moving the Cursor and Zooming in Chart View
cursor position
distance to cursor position
bearing to cursor position
cursor
digital
readouts
cursor
saved route
waypoint
current
track
ZOOM In
Move the Cursor
ZOOM Out
When the boat is stationary, it is drawn as a circle.
When the boat is in motion, it changes to a boat shape, pointed in the direction of motion.
145
Navigation Overview
Shifting the Eye Point and Zooming in Bird’s Eye View
boat icon
Move the Eye Point
Navigation Overview
ZOOM In
ZOOM Out
146
Exit
NAVIGATION ALARMS OVERVIEW
When an alarm is turned on, an alert will sound or display on the control head to indicate the threshold has been exceeded. When
you set the Off Course Alarm, Arrival Alarm, and Drift Alarm, the limits are shown on the Chart View.
Turn on Alarms and Adjust Settings
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Alarms tab.
2. Select an alarm menu. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the threshold.
Off Course Alarm
Sets how far the boat can move off course during navigation before an alarm will be triggered.
GPS required.
Arrival Alarm
Sets how close the boat must be to the destination waypoint before the alarm will be triggered.
GPS required.
Drift Alarm
Sets how far the boat can move from its anchored position outside the drift alarm perimeter
before an alarm will be triggered. GPS required.
Off Course Alarm and Arrival Circle
arrival circle
off course limits
147
Navigation Alarms Overview
MAN OVERBOARD (MOB) NAVIGATION
As soon as you know that you have a man overboard (MOB), activate Man Overboard navigation to maximize the chances for a
successful rescue. Man Overboard navigation marks the approximate point where the person went overboard and starts continuous
navigation toward the Man Overboard waypoint.
Activate Man Overboard Navigation
1. Press and hold the GOTO/MOB key until Man Overboard Navigation is activated.
Activating Man Overboard Navigation
Man
Overboard
marked
Man Overboard
navigation in progress
Man Overboard
waypoint position
Elapsed time since the MOB
waypoint was marked
Press and hold to start
MOB navigation
Man Overboard Navigation
148
When Man Overboard is activated, any current navigation will be cancelled and the current route will be discarded without
notification. Man Overboard navigation will begin immediately, and you will see the following on the screen:
Chart View: The view will switch to Chart View automatically.
Man Overboard Waypoint: A waypoint is created at the boat’s current position, regardless of whether the chart cursor is active
or not.
Continuous Navigation: The control head will start continuous navigation toward the Man Overboard waypoint.
Auto Zoom: The screen magnifies to show the Man Overboard waypoint and the boat on the screen.
Cancel Man Overboard Navigation
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Select Cancel MOB Navigation.
149
Man Overboard Navigation
WAYPOINTS
Waypoints are saved latitude/longitude positions. They mark a position of interest such as your favorite fishing area, structure, or
marker buoy. The control head saves the position and allows you to edit the waypoint name, icon, and more (see Manage your
Navigation Data). You can save 2,750 waypoints to the control head.
Customize Waypoint Display Settings
You can use the waypoint settings provided by your control head, or you can customize the waypoints shown on the view. You can
also edit waypoints from the Chart View or from the Waypoint Management dialog box (see Manage your Navigation Data).
Change New Waypoint Settings
You can customize waypoint settings for all new waypoints. To edit waypoints after they’ve been marked, see Edit a Waypoint in the
Chart View or Manage your Navigation Data.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Waypoint Settings. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to set the following:
Icon Category
Select a category to assign to new waypoints (All, Geometry, Alerts, Supplies, Navigation, etc.)
Default Waypoint
Icon
Select an icon for all new waypoints. To see the most icon options, set the Icon Category to
All.
Select Default, and the system will apply your settings to new waypoints.
New Waypoint
Icon
If you choose Select, each time you mark a waypoint (see Mark Waypoints), you can change
the waypoint icon and category. See Mark and Edit Waypoints (on-the-go) in this section for
details.
4. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Show/Hide Casting Rings
Use Casting Rings to display a circle at a set distance around each waypoint in the Chart View. Casting rings are not applied to
decluttered waypoints (see Declutter Waypoints).
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Casting Rings.
3. Use the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to set how far the casting rings will be displayed from the waypoints.
Hide: Select Off to hide the casting rings.
Waypoints
150
Show/Hide Waypoint Proximity Flags
Waypoint flags show the distance from the boat (or active cursor) to each waypoint. If set to visible, the waypoint flags for the ten
closest waypoints to the boat or cursor will be shown on the Chart View.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Waypoint Proximity Flags.
3. Select Hidden or Visible.
NOTE: Waypoint Proximity Flags are also influenced by the zoom level and boat speed. The flags are displayed if the chart range
is less than .5 sm and the boat is traveling less than 15 mph.
Declutter Waypoints
Use Waypoint Decluttering to control how the waypoint icon and name are displayed.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Waypoint Decluttering.
3. Select On or Off.
On
If waypoints are displayed close together, the names will be shortened, and the icons will be
displayed as small black icons. To see a decluttered waypoint at full size, select it with the
cursor, or press the +ZOOM key repeatedly.
Off
Waypoint names and icons will be displayed at regular size.
NOTE: To increase the text size, see Customize the Chart View: Increase the Text Size.
Waypoints and Decluttered Waypoints
decluttered
waypoint
waypoint
at full size
with name
displayed
151
Waypoints
Mark Waypoints
Waypoints can be marked at the boat position or cursor position. To edit the waypoint, see Edit a Waypoint in the Chart View or
Manage your Navigation Data.
Mark a Waypoint at the Boat Position
1. Press the MARK key.
Mark a Waypoint at the Cursor Position
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position on the chart.
2. Press the MARK key twice.
Marking a Waypoint
cursor position
distance to cursor position
bearing to cursor position
cursor
digital
readouts
cursor
Press Twice to
Mark a Waypoint
Move the Cursor
Waypoints
152
Select a Waypoint in the Chart View
You can select a saved waypoint using the menu system or using the cursor on the Chart View.
Select a Saved Waypoint on the Chart View
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a waypoint on the Chart View.
Edit: Press the MENU key. Select the waypoint from the menu. Press the RIGHT Cursor key. Select Edit.
More Info: Press the CHECK/INFO key.
Start Navigation: Press the GOTO key twice.
2. Exit Cursor: Press the EXIT key.
Select the Last Saved Waypoint
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Select the waypoint name from the X-Press Menu.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Select a menu from the waypoint menu.
Search and Select a Saved Waypoint
Use these instructions to search quickly for a waypoint, which is helpful if you cannot locate it on the Chart View.
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Cursor to Waypoint. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to sort the list.
4. Select the waypoint name from the menu. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
5. Press the EXIT key once.
6. The cursor will select the waypoint on the Chart View.
Edit: Press the MENU key. Select the waypoint from the menu. Press the RIGHT Cursor key. Select Edit.
More Info: Press the CHECK/INFO key.
Start Navigation: Press the GOTO key twice.
153
Waypoints
Edit a Waypoint
You can edit a waypoint as you mark it or after it is saved. The instructions in this section show you how to edit a waypoint in the
Chart View. To edit a waypoint or a group of waypoints from the Waypoint Management dialog box, see Manage your Navigation Data.
Mark and Edit Waypoints (on-the-go)
Use the instructions in this section to edit a waypoint as soon as you mark it.
1. Setup: See Change New Waypoint Settings. Set the New Waypoint Icon menu to Select.
2. Press the MARK key.
OR
Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a position. Press the MARK key twice.
3. Edit: When you mark a waypoint, the Waypoint Settings menu will display so you can edit the waypoint.
No Changes: To proceed without making changes, press the MARK key (again).
Edit a Waypoint in the Chart View
Use these instructions to edit a waypoint from the Chart View. You can also edit waypoints in the Waypoint Management dialog box
(see Manage your Navigation Data).
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a waypoint on the Chart View.
2. Press the MENU key.
3. Select the waypoint name from the X-Press Menu. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Select Edit. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Editing a Waypoint from the X-Press Menu
selected waypoint
selecting Edit
from the
waypoint
submenu
5. Use the Edit Waypoint menu to edit the waypoint name, icon, and more (see Manage your Navigation Data for more
information).
Waypoints
154
Changing the Waypoint Name
Move from Space to Space
Select a Letter, Number, or Symbol
Save
6. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
7. Close: Press the EXIT key.
Change the Waypoint Position in the Chart View
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a waypoint on the Chart View.
2. Press the MENU key.
3. Select the waypoint name from the X-Press Menu. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Select Edit. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
5. Select the latitude position. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
6. Use the Cursor Control key to enter a new position.
7. Save: Press the CHECK/INFO key.
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to change the longitude position.
9. Close: Press the EXIT key.
10.Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Show/Hide a Waypoint Target
Use the instructions in this section to display a target around a selected waypoint.
Display a Target
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a waypoint on the Chart View.
2. Press the MENU key.
3. Select the waypoint name from the X-Press Menu. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Select Target. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
155
Waypoints
Waypoint with Target Displayed
selected
waypoint
target
Remove a Target
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Remove Target. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Show/Hide a Waypoint Trolling Grid
Use the instructions in this section to display a trolling grid on a selected waypoint.
Display a Trolling Grid
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a waypoint on the Chart View.
2. Press the MENU key.
3. Select the waypoint name from the X-Press menu. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Select Grid. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Adjust the Trolling Grid Rotation
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Trolling Grid Rotation.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Remove a Trolling Grid
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Remove Grid. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Waypoints
156
Delete a Waypoint in the Chart View
Use the following instructions to select a waypoint and delete it.
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a waypoint on the Chart View.
2. Press the MENU key.
3. Select the waypoint name from the X-Press Menu. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Select Delete. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Navigate to a Waypoint or Position
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a waypoint or position on the chart.
2. Press the GOTO key twice.
NOTE: If you are starting navigation to the cursor position, a waypoint will be marked when you press the GOTO key.
Starting Navigation to the Cursor Position
cursor position
distance to cursor position
bearing to cursor position
cursor
digital
readouts
destination
waypoint
name
off course
limits
Press Twice to
Start Navigation
Move the Cursor
157
Waypoints
Navigate to a Saved Position
If you press the GOTO key, you can choose to start navigation from a list of saved waypoints and routes.
1. Press the GOTO key.
2. Select Nav Data. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to select a saved waypoint or route.
4. Press the RIGHT Cursor key to start navigation.
Navigate Continuously Around a Waypoint
Continuous Navigation Mode allows you to continue to navigate and fish around a selected waypoint, even if you pass over it multiple
times.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Continuous Navigation Mode.
3. Select On.
4. Press the EXIT key repeatedly until the menu system is closed.
5. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a waypoint.
6. Press the GOTO key twice.
Waypoints
158
ROUTES
Routes link two or more waypoints together to create a path for navigation. A route represents your intended navigation and shows
the shortest path from each data point to the next. The distance between each waypoint is a route leg. You can save 47 routes (with
50 waypoints each) to the control head.
WARNING! You should always be aware of your surroundings and watch for any potential obstacles.
Create a Route and Start Navigation
Use the instructions in this section to connect waypoints and start navigation immediately. To create a route from the Waypoint
Management dialog box, see Manage your Navigation Data.
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a waypoint or position on the chart.
2. Press the GOTO key twice.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more waypoints to the route.
Creating and Navigating a Route
2nd waypoint
route leg
course
projection
line
1st waypoint
route start
point
current
track
north up
indicator
chart orientation
Press Twice to
Start Navigation
Move the Cursor
159
Routes
Save the Current Route
A route must have at least two waypoints to be saved as a route.
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Save Current Route. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to save or discard the route.
Change the Route During Navigation
The X-Press Menu allows you to make changes to the route while you are navigating it.
Skipping a Waypoint During Navigation
Skip a Waypoint
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View or Bird’s Eye View displayed on-screen, press the GOTO key once.
2. Select Skip Next Waypoint.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Change the Route Order
The route must be saved before you can change the travel order (see Save the Current Route).
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View or Bird’s Eye View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select the route name. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Travel Forward or Travel Reverse.
4. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Routes
160
Reset XTE (Cross Track Error)
Use Reset XTE to recalculate the cross track error (XTE) from the boat’s current position to the next waypoint in the route.
For example, if you’ve deviated from a route to navigate around an island, select Reset XTE to update the control head’s course
calculations from the current boat position instead of from the previous waypoint in the route.
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View or Bird’s Eye View displayed on-screen, press the GOTO key once.
2. Select Reset XTE.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Cancel Navigation
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Cancel Navigation. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to cancel navigation and save the route.
Start Navigation on a Saved Route
Use the cursor to select a waypoint in a saved route, and you can start navigation to it. You can also choose the order of navigation.
Start Navigation on a Saved Route
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a waypoint on a route.
If you select the first waypoint in the route, the route will turn red.
2. Press the GOTO key.
3. Select a travel order.
Go To Point
Start navigation to the selected waypoint only.
Forward from
Point
Start navigation to the selected waypoint and continue traveling the route forward from there.
Reverse from
Point
Start navigation to the selected waypoint and travel the route in reverse from there.
Travel Forward
Start navigation to the first waypoint in the route and continue traveling the route forward
from there.
Travel Reverse
Start navigation to the last waypoint in the route and travel the route in reverse from there.
161
Routes
Selecting a Saved Route on the Chart View
cursor
digital
readouts
selected
route name
current
track
selected
route
(red)
Select a Waypoint
on a Route
Open the Go To Menu
Navigate to a Saved Position
If you press the GOTO key, you can choose to start navigation from a list of saved waypoints and routes.
1. Press the GOTO key.
2. Select Nav Data. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to select a saved waypoint or route.
4. Press the RIGHT Cursor key to start navigation.
Routes
162
Edit a Saved Route
You can edit the route name and display it or hide it on the Chart View. To edit routes from the Waypoint Management dialog box,
see Manage your Navigation Data.
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a waypoint on the route. Press the MENU key.
OR
If the route was saved recently, you don’t have to select it first. Press the MENU key.
2. Select the route name from the X-Press Menu. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Edit. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Use the Cursor Control key to change the route name.
Visibility: Select Visible or Hidden.
5. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Changing the Route Name
Move from Space to Space
Select a Letter, Number, or Symbol
Save
Delete a Saved Route
You can delete a route from the Chart View or the Waypoint Management dialog box. To delete a route from the Waypoint
Management dialog box, see Manage your Navigation Data.
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a waypoint on the route. Press the MENU key.
OR
If the route was saved recently, you don’t have to select it first. Press the MENU key.
2. Select the route name from the X-Press Menu. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Delete. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to delete the route.
163
Routes
TRACKS
A track is a collection of track points that contains the boat’s detailed position history at set intervals. The Current Track shows the
position history since the control head was powered on. You can clear the Current Track or save it at any time. To change the track
point interval, edit saved tracks, and create track settings, see Manage your Navigation Data. You can save 50 tracks (each with
20,000 track points) to the control head.
Chart View with the Current Track Displayed
current
track
Change New Track Settings
You can use the track settings provided by your control head, or you can customize the tracks shown on the view. You can also edit
tracks from the Chart View or from the Waypoint Management dialog box (see Manage your Navigation Data).
Set the Default Track Appearance
Use the instructions in this section to customize settings for all new tracks. To edit tracks after they’ve been saved, see Edit the
Current Track and Manage your Navigation Data.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Saved Track Defaults. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Changing the Current Track Appearance
hidden or visible
To display the
color options,
select a line style.
save
Tracks
164
3. Use the Cursor Control key to change the following:
Visibility
To show all tracks on the chart, select Visible. To hide tracks, select Hidden. If you choose
Hidden, the control head continues to save trackpoints, but the track will not be displayed on
the view.
Style
Select a line style (dotted, line, etc.) for all new tracks.
Color
If you select a line style, you can also select the line color.
4. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Change the Trackpoint Interval and Trackpoint Min Distance
Trackpoint Interval and Track Min (minimum) Distance work together to add a trackpoint to the current track. During slow travel or
drift, setting both Trackpoint Interval and Track Min Distance to small values increases the track resolution. Setting the menus to
higher values will cause the track to extend back further in time, but it will be less detailed.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Trackpoint Interval.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
4. Select Track Min Distance.
5. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Save the Current Track
Use the following instructions to save the current track and start a new track.
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Save Current Track. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to save or discard the track.
NOTE: It is important to save the track before powering off the control head.
Edit the Current Track
Use the following instructions to edit the current track. To edit a saved track, see Manage your Navigation Data.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Current Track. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Appearance.
4. Use the Cursor Control key to change the visibility, style, and color.
See Change New Track Settings for details.
5. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
165
Tracks
Clear the Current Track
Use the following instructions to clear the current track on the view and start a new track at the present boat position.
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select Clear Current Track.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Show/Hide the Current Track
The current track is shown on the Chart View automatically. To hide or show the current track, use the following instructions. To show
or hide a saved track, see Manage your Navigation Data.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Current Track. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Appearance.
4. Select Visibility.
5. Select Hidden or Visible.
6. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Stop Tracking
Use the instructions in this section to turn off tracking. If you turn off tracking, the unit will not save trackpoints.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Current Track. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Stop Tracking. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
To start tracking, select the Nav tab > Current Track > Start Tracking.
Tracks
166
SEARCH
There are many ways to search the area for ports, tide stations, and current stations. You can also search for information based on
the cursor position. The search options and the search area distance are determined by the installed map card and selected map
source.
Search by Nearest Port, Tide Station, or Current Station
The control head must have a separate-purchase map card installed to enable the features in this section.
1. Press the CHECK/INFO key.
2. Select Nearest Port, Nearest Tide Station, or Nearest Current Station.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Chart Info: Tide Station
Search by Cursor Position
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a waypoint or position on the chart.
2. Press the CHECK/INFO key.
Chart Info: Cursor Position
167
Search
Search for Contour Depth
1. Use the Cursor Control key to move the cursor to a contour on the chart.
2. Press the CHECK/INFO key.
Search for a Lake
Use this menu to display a lake other than your current location. The lake map displayed on the Chart View is based on the GPS
latitude/longitude position and the Humminbird LakeMaster map card installed in the control head. GPS reception is required for
the correct lake to be displayed.
The Lake List menu option allows you to display a different lake from the installed map card. When you select a lake, the cursor will
move to the lake so you can see it on the Chart View. Then, you can mark waypoints, press the GOTO key to start navigation toward
a waypoint, or press the CHECK/INFO key for more information.
No GPS Reception: If you don’t have a GPS Fix, you can view the lake in Simulator mode. When you power on the control head, press the
MENU key. Select Simulator from the Start-Up Options Menu. You can mark waypoints and routes and save them in Simulator mode.
NOTE: A Humminbird LakeMaster map card must be installed to enable this feature.
Search for a Lake
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the HB Chart tab.
2. Select Lake List.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Sort By: Select the Sort By field, and press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a sort option for the list. You can sort
alphabetically, identify the high-definition lakes (Hi-Def) on your card, etc.
Scroll: Press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys to scroll through the list. As each lake is highlighted, you can view information about
the lake in the box displayed on the screen.
Cursor To: Select a lake on the list. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Selecting a Lake to Display
selected lake
information
about the
selected lake
Search
168
MANAGE YOUR NAVIGATION DATA
Your control head allows you to start navigation or edit your navigation data from the Chart View. You can also start navigation or
edit navigation data from the Waypoint Management dialog box. The instructions in this section apply to the Waypoint Management
dialog box.
Overview
Open the Waypoint Management Dialog Box
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Waypoints, Routes, Tracks.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Sort
You can sort your saved navigation data alphabetically or by newest/oldest date, distance, or icon.
1. Press the EXIT key.
2. Select Sort By.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a sort setting.
Select a File
Use these instructions to select an individual waypoint, route, track, or group. Then, use the submenu to apply settings or actions
to the selected file.
1. Press the DOWN or UP Cursor keys to select a waypoint, route, track, or group.
2. Open the Submenu: Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
169
Manage your Navigation Data
Selecting Files in the Waypoint Management Dialog Box (Waypoints, Routes, Tracks)
selected file
(highlighted in yellow)
selected file
preview
waypoint
route
track
Directory: Bass08 is
the selected group
information and
instructions
Scroll through the List
Manage your Navigation Data
Open a Menu
170
Go Back
Jump to the Top
The Options menu, and other important actions, are located at the top of the Waypoint Management dialog box. Use these
instructions to quickly select Options or jump to the top.
1. Press the EXIT key.
Selecting Options (Jump to the Top)
Options
Directory: Bass08 is
the selected group
information
Jump to the Top
Open a Menu
171
Manage your Navigation Data
Manage Waypoints
When you press the MARK key and create a new waypoint, an alphanumeric name (beginning with WP) is assigned to the waypoint.
You can use the Waypoint Management dialog box to edit the saved waypoint or create a new waypoint. You can also select a
waypoint icon and category for all new waypoints. .
Open the Waypoint Submenu
1. Select a waypoint from the Waypoint Management dialog box. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select one of the following menu options:
Edit
Opens the Edit Waypoint menu. See Edit a Saved Waypoint for details.
Delete
Deletes the waypoint. To remove the waypoint from the group, choose Selected. To delete the
waypoint from all groups, choose All Instances. See Delete a Waypoint for details.
Duplicate
Creates a copy of the waypoint and adds it to a new group or route (see Search and Organize).
Save As
Creates a new waypoint (based on the selected waypoint) and opens a menu so you can
change the new waypoint’s name. See Search and Organize for details.
Move
Moves the waypoint from the selected group to a different group (see Search and Organize).
Cursor To
Moves the cursor to the selected waypoint in the Chart View (see Navigation Overview:
Waypoints).
Go To
Starts navigation to the selected waypoint (see Navigation Overview: Waypoints).
Target
Displays a target on the selected waypoint in the Chart View (see Navigation Overview:
Waypoints).
Grid
Displays a grid on the selected waypoint in the Chart View (see Navigation Overview:
Waypoints).
Manage Waypoints
172
Editing a Waypoint
icon category
changing the icon
visibility
latitude
longitude
save
waypoint information
Edit a Saved Waypoint
1. Select a waypoint. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Edit. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to edit the available fields.
Name
Select the file name, and press the RIGHT Cursor key. See the illustration Changing the
Waypoint Name.
Icon Category
Select All to view all available icons. (All, Geometry, Alerts, Supplies, Navigation, Recreation,
Fish, Environment)
Icon
The available icons are determined by the category selected in Icon Category.
Visibility
To show the waypoint icon on the Chart View, select Visible. To hide it, select Hidden.
Latitude
Longitude
To move from space to space, press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys. To change the letter or
number, press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys.
4. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
173
Manage Waypoints
Changing the Waypoint Name
Move from Space to Space
Select a Letter, Number, or Symbol
Save
Create a New Waypoint
Use the following instructions to create a new waypoint and add your own settings. To mark a waypoint in Chart View, see Navigation
Overview: Waypoints.
1. Open a Group or Route: Select a group or route (where you want to save the new waypoint). Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Home is the highest level group, or the main directory, in the Waypoint Management dialog box.
2. Select Open. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Options > New > New Waypoint.
4. Create New Waypoint: Use the Cursor Control key to set the available fields. See Edit a Saved Waypoint for details.
5. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Manage Waypoints
174
Set the Waypoint Icon Default
Use the following instructions to set the waypoint icon category and the waypoint icon for all new waypoints.
NOTE: If the Waypoint Management dialog box is open, press the EXIT key to close the dialog box, and proceed with the following
instructions.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Waypoint Settings. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to set your new waypoint preferences.
Icon Category
Select All to view all available icons. (All, Geometry, Alerts, Supplies, Navigation, Recreation,
Fish, Environment)
Default Waypoint
Icon
The available icons are determined by the category selected in Icon Category.
Default: When you mark a waypoint, the waypoint will be marked using the settings.
New Waypoint
Icon
Select: Each time you mark a waypoint, you will be prompted to change the waypoint icon and
category. To accept the current settings, press the MARK key again. See Waypoints: Mark and
Edit Waypoints (on-the-go) in the Navigation section.
4. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Delete a Waypoint
1. Select a waypoint. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Delete. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. To remove the waypoint from the group, choose Selected.
To delete the waypoint from all groups, choose All Instances.
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to delete the waypoint.
175
Manage Waypoints
Manage Routes
You can edit your saved routes, and you can also create new routes from scratch using your saved waypoints. Route names are
alphanumeric and begin with RT.
Open the Route Submenu
1. Select a route from the Waypoint Management dialog box. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select one of the following menu options:
Open
Displays the saved waypoints in the route. You can change the waypoint order from this menu
(see Change the Waypoint Order in a Route).
Travel
Starts navigation on the selected route in forward or reverse (see Travel a Saved Route).
Add/Remove
Copies waypoints into the route or deletes waypoints from the route. See Add Waypoints to
a Route and Delete a Waypoint from a Route.
Edit
Opens the Edit Route menu. See Edit a Saved Route for details.
Delete
Deletes the route. To delete the route from the selected group, choose Selected. To delete
the route from all groups, choose All Instances. See Delete a Route for details.
Duplicate
Creates a copy of the route and adds it to a new group (see Search and Organize).
Save As
Creates a new route (based on the selected route) and opens a dialog box so you can change
the new route’s name (see Search and Organize).
Move
Moves the route from the selected group to a different group (see Search and Organize).
Info
Opens the Route Info box and displays the waypoints in the route. To change the waypoints
in a route, see Add Waypoints to a Route and Delete a Waypoint from a Route.
Manage Routes
176
Open a Saved Route
1. Select a route. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Open. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Opening a Saved Route
waypoint order
(first to last)
Directory: RT002 is
the selected route
Review Route Distance Information
Use the instructions in this section to open a saved route and review the distance and bearing from each waypoint to the next.
1. Select a route. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Info. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Reviewing Route Information
distance
bearing
route name
waypoints
route summary
177
Manage Routes
Travel a Saved Route
1. Select a route. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Travel. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Forward or Reverse. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Navigation begins immediately. The Waypoint Management dialog box will close so you can see the route on the Chart View.
Edit a Saved Route
You can customize a route name, add or remove waypoints, and change the travel order for navigation.
To add waypoints to the route, or delete waypoints from the route, see Add Waypoints to a Route and Delete a Waypoint from a
Route.
To change the travel order in a route, see Change the Waypoint Order in a Route.
1. Select a route. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Edit. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to edit the available fields.
Name
Select the file name, and press the RIGHT Cursor key. See the illustration Changing the Route
Name.
Visibility
To show the route on the Chart View, select Visible. To hide it, select Hidden.
4. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Changing the Route Name
Move from Space to Space
Manage Routes
Select a Letter, Number, or Symbol
178
Save
Create a New Route
1. Open a Group: Select a group (where you want to save the new route). Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Home is the highest level group, or the main directory, in the Waypoint Management dialog box.
2. Select Options > New > New Route.
3. Create New Route: Use the Cursor Control key to edit the available fields.
Name
Select the item name, and press the RIGHT Cursor key. See the illustration Changing the Route
Name.
Visibility
To show the route on the Chart View, select Visible. To hide it, select Hidden.
4. Plan Route: Select Plan Route. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
The New Route menu closes so you can select waypoints to add to the route.
Selecting Plan Route
Select
5. Add Waypoints: Press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys to scroll through the available waypoints.
To add a selected waypoint to the route, press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Repeat as needed. See the illustration Adding Waypoints to a Route.
6. Save: Press the EXIT key to select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
179
Manage Routes
Adding Waypoints to a Route
sort files
next steps
selected waypoint
(highlighted in yellow)
Directory: Bass08 is
the selected group
instructions
Scroll through the List
Select
Add Waypoints to a Route
When you add a waypoint to a route, it is a copy. If you make changes to the copy, the changes will be made to all copies.
1. Select a route. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Add/Remove. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
The menu will close.
3. Press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys to choose a waypoint. Press the RIGHT Cursor key to add it to the route.
4. Save: Press the EXIT key to select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Manage Routes
180
Delete a Waypoint from a Route
1. Select a route. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Open. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select a waypoint in the route. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Select Delete. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
5. To remove the waypoint from the group, choose Selected.
To delete the waypoint from all groups, choose All Instances.
6. Follow the on-screen prompts to delete the waypoint.
Change the Waypoint Order in a Route
1. Select a route. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Open. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3a. Select Reverse, and press the RIGHT Cursor key. This will quickly reverse the order of the route.
OR
3b. Choose a Waypoint in the route, and press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Select Reorder, and press the RIGHT Cursor key.
To move the waypoint up or down in the route order, press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys.
See the illustration Changing the Route Order (Moving a Waypoint).
4. Press the EXIT key to select Save.
Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Delete a Route
1. Select a route. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Delete. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. To remove the route from the group, choose Selected.
To delete the route from all groups, choose All Instances.
181
Manage Routes
Changing the Route Order (Moving a Waypoint)
move a waypoint
up or down in the
route order
Directory: RT002 is
the selected route
instructions
Select the Waypoint
Manage Routes
Move the Waypoint Up or Down
182
Confirm the New Location
Manage Tracks
Save and edit your tracks with the Waypoint Management dialog box. Track names are saved with a date and time stamp. The Tracks
submenu allows you to edit the track name, appearance, and the track visibility. You can also move tracks from one group to another
group.
Open the Track Submenu
1. Select a track from the Waypoint Management dialog box. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select one of the following menu options:
Edit
Opens the Edit Track menu. See Edit a Saved Track for details.
Delete
Deletes the track. To delete the track from the selected group, choose Selected. To delete the
track from all groups, choose All Instances. See Delete a Saved Track for details.
Duplicate
Creates a copy of the track and adds it to a new group (see Search and Organize).
Save As
Creates a new track (based on the selected track) and opens a menu so you can change the
new track’s name (see Search and Organize).
Move
Moves the track from the selected group to a different group (see Search and Organize).
Editing a Track
track name
hidden or visible
To display the color
options, select
a line style.
save
track summary
183
Manage Tracks
Edit a Saved Track
Use the following instructions to edit a saved track. To edit the current track, see Navigation Overview: Tracks.
1. Select a track. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Edit. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to edit the available fields.
Select the file name, and press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Name
To move from space to space, press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys. To change the letter or
number, press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys.
Visibility
To show the icon on the Chart View, select Visible. To hide it, select Hidden.
Style
Select a line style.
Color
Select a color. The Color field is available if you’ve selected a solid line in the Style field.
4. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Delete a Saved Track
1. Select a track. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Delete. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. To remove the track from the group, choose Selected.
To delete the track from all groups, choose All Instances.
Manage Tracks
184
Manage Groups
Use groups to organize your waypoints, routes, and tracks in one set. Some anglers prefer to group their navigation items by trip,
fish-type, body of water, or time of day. New group names are alphanumeric and begin with GP, and you can edit the name.
NOTE: Groups and sub-groups use storage. The storage limit of your waypoints and routes may vary due to the complexity of your
Waypoint Management directory.
Open the Group Submenu
1. Select a group from the Waypoint Management dialog box. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select one of the following menu options:
Open
Displays the saved waypoints, routes, and tracks in the group.
Add/Remove
Copies waypoints, routes, and tracks into the group or deletes files from the group (see
Add/Remove Navigation Items).
Edit
Opens the Edit Group menu. See Edit a Group for details.
Delete
Deletes the group (see Delete a Group).
Move
Moves the group from one location to another (see Search and Organize).
185
Manage Groups
Set a Group as the Default Directory
To save all your new waypoints, routes, and tracks to a designated group, use the following steps:
1. Select a group. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Open. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Options > Set as Default.
Create a New Group
1. Select a Save Location: Use the Cursor Control key to choose where you want to save the new group.
Home is the highest level group, or the main directory. You can also add a subgroup to an existing group. The current group
is where the new data will be saved.
2. Select Options > New > New Group.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to set the available fields.
4. Add Items: Select Add Items, and press the RIGHT Cursor key.
The New Group dialog box will close so you can select items from the Waypoint Management dialog box. You can also leave
the group empty and add to it later.
Press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys to choose a waypoint, route, or track, and press the RIGHT Cursor key to add it to the group.
Repeat as needed. See the illustration Adding Items to a Group.
5. Save: Press the EXIT key to select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
NOTE: When you add an item to a group, it is a copy. If you make changes to the copy, the changes will be made to all copies. For
example, if you change the waypoint icon for a waypoint that is saved in more than one group, the icon will change in all the
groups where the waypoint is saved.
Manage Groups
186
Adding Items to a Group
sort files
next steps
instructions
Scroll Up or Down
Add
Add/Remove Navigation Items
1. Select a group. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Add/Remove. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
The menu will close.
3. Add: Press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys to choose a waypoint, route, or track. Press the RIGHT Cursor key to add it to the
group.
Remove: Select an item in the group. Press the RIGHT Cursor key to delete it.
4. Repeat step 3 as needed. You can add or remove items from any other group in the Waypoint Management dialog box.
5. Save: Press the EXIT key to select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
NOTE: When you add an item to a group, it is a copy. If you make changes to a copy, the changes will be made to all copies.
187
Manage Groups
Edit a Group
1. Select a group. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Edit. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to edit the available fields.
Name
Select the file name, and press the RIGHT Cursor key. See the illustration Changing the Group
Name.
Visibility
To show the group on the Chart View, select Visible. To hide it, select Hidden.
4. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Changing the Group Name
Move from Space to Space
Select a Letter, Number, or Symbol
Delete a Group
1. Select a group. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Delete. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to confirm.
Manage Groups
188
Save
Search and Organize
The Waypoint Management dialog box allows you to move your waypoints, routes, and tracks into a designated group, make copies,
and search for information. You can also organize your navigation items in HumminbirdPC (see Import/Export Navigation Data),
and visit our Web site at humminbird.com for details.
Search By
Search By allows you to search the items in the Waypoint Management dialog box by Name, Distance, Date, Icon, or Icon Category.
1. Select Options. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Search By.
3. Select a search category. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Use the Cursor Control key to enter your search criteria in the dialog box.
5. Select Enter. Press the RIGHT Cursor key to start the search.
Duplicate or Move
Use the following instructions to move or duplicate a waypoint, route, or track. Groups can be moved, but they cannot be duplicated.
NOTE: When you make changes to a copied item, the changes are applied to all copies. To make a copy and set the item apart from
its copies, use Save As (see Create a Copy and Save as a New Item).
1. Select a waypoint, route, track, or group. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Move or Duplicate.
Duplicate: To create a copy of the waypoint, route, or track so that it appears in more than one group, select Duplicate.
Move: To delete the group, waypoint, route, or track from one group and transfer it to another group, select Move.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to select the destination group or route (waypoints only).
4. Press the EXIT key to select Paste here. Press the RIGHT Cursor key to confirm the change.
189
Search and Organize
Selecting Multiple Waypoints
sort files
next steps
selected waypoints
(highlighted in yellow)
Directory: Bass08 is
the selected group
instructions
Scroll Up or Down
Select
Create a Copy and Save as a New Item
Use the instructions in this section to copy a waypoint, route, or track and save it as a separate item. The new item retains the
properties from the original, but it will not be affected by changes to the original.
1. Select a waypoint, route, or track. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Save As. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to name the new item.
4. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Search and Organize
190
Import/Export Navigation Data
Import Navigation Data
Use the following instructions to import waypoints, routes, tracks, and groups into your Humminbird control head. The control head
will import Humminbird navigation data from an installed microSD or SD card. See HELIX Control Head for compatibility details.
If the navigation data is from another source or format, it must be converted (using HumminbirdPC) before you can import it. Visit
our Web site at humminbird.com for details.
WARNING! Do NOT import navigation data from unknown sources into your Humminbird control head without first converting the
data to the correct format using HumminbirdPC. Importing corrupted data can cause the unit to malfunction, which can result
in lost navigation data.
1. Install a loaded microSD or SD card into the control head.
2. Follow the on-screen prompts to confirm or cancel the import.
Export ALL Navigation Items
Export your navigation items to an unlocked, installed microSD or SD card (separate purchase required) and then view them in
HumminbirdPC. Visit our Web site at humminbird.com for details.
1. Select Options > Select All and... > Export.
2. Follow the on-screen prompts to confirm or cancel the export.
Export Selected Navigation Items
You can also select individual navigation items and export them to an unlocked, installed microSD or SD card. See HELIX Control
Head for compatibility details.
1. From a selected group, select Options > Select Multiple and... > Export.
2. Select Items: Press the UP or DOWN Cursor keys to scroll through the waypoints, routes, and tracks. Press the RIGHT Cursor
key to select an item. Repeat as needed.
3. Confirm Export: Press the EXIT key to select Export Selected.
Press the RIGHT Cursor key. Follow the on-screen prompts to confirm or cancel the export.
Delete all Navigation Data and Reset
Use Format Nav Directories to delete ALL navigation data (waypoints, routes, tracks, and groups) and reset the navigation data
directory in the Waypoint Management dialog box. You may need to reset the navigation directory if you’ve imported corrupted
navigation data from an unknown source, which can cause the unit to malfunction.
CAUTION! Use this menu with caution! Contact Humminbird Customer Service before using this menu option.
NOTE: It is important to back up your control head’s data files periodically. Data files should also be saved to your PC before
restoring the unit’s defaults or updating the software. See Manage your Navigation Data: Import/Export Navigation Data.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select Format Nav Directories.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to confirm the deletion.
191
Manage Exporting and Deleting
AUTOCHART LIVE OVERVIEW
AutoChart Live uses data from an installed GPS receiver and 2D transducer (down beam, DualBeamPLUS) to create detailed depth
maps of your favorite waters.
Map Source: Humminbird LakeMaster or Navionics
Storage: AutoChart Live saves 8 hours of mapping data on your control head. After 8 hours of data has been collected, you can
erase the data and continue mapping, or you can purchase a ZeroLine Map Card for unlimited mapping.
ZeroLine Map Card: To purchase a ZeroLine Map Card and download the accessory guide, visit our Web site at humminbird.com.
More Information: Visit our Web site for informational videos.
PLAN YOUR MAP
Before getting started, consider the areas where you want to create a map. Review the following tips to plan your map:
General Tips
• Start with your favorite fishing hot spots. It is not recommended to record survey data of an entire lake, as it will require a lot
of time to map and might include areas you don’t want.
• Take a different route to and from each fishing spot every trip. You may discover new and interesting areas to map.
• Start a new track or recording when you start for the day. Record new data every trip to create new maps or improve existing
maps.
• Navigate the boat at a consistent speed when recording data.
• See the illustration below for instruction on how to navigate your boat while recording survey data.
Mapping a Specific Area or Object in Detail
• Navigate the boat across the area rather than alongside.
• Turn the boat where the area and/or object is out of range of the transducer beam(s).
• Try to reduce the measurement time, so as to reduce the error due to possible GPS variations.
Mapping an Entire Lake
• Follow a plan.
• Follow the maximum gradient of the sea floor (up or down).
• Keep a steady speed. For optimal performance, 0 to 8 mph is recommended.
• Turn the boat where the bottom is flat if possible.
Navigating the Boat to Record Survey Data
Navigate your boat in a
zig-zag pattern, first in
one direction and then
in the other.
AutoChart Live
192
1. PREPARE THE CONTROL HEAD FOR MAPPING
When you start your mapping for the day, it is important to note if the water level is higher or lower than usual. It is also important
to use your 2D transducer beams exclusively.
Set the Map Source
AutoChart Live can be used when a Humminbird LakeMaster or Navionics map card is installed and selected as the map source. When
you install a map card, the map source is changed automatically to match the microSD or SD card map source. You can also change
the map source manually. If your control head has two cards installed, you can choose which map source you want to use (HELIX
9, 10, 12 only).
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Chart tab.
2. Select Map Source.
3. Select the installed Humminbird LakeMaster or Navionics map card location or a built-in map.
Confirm the 2D Transducer and Turn off Additional Transducers
To record your custom map, you must have a reliable and accurate digital depth from a pinging 2D transducer. You can use your
Humminbird DualBeam PLUS transducer (83/200 kHz), Side Imaging transducer with 2D (down beam) capabilities, or a CHIRP
transducer with 2D (down beam) capabilities.
When you are recording your map, you should have only one 2D transducer pinging on your boat. If you have other 2D transducers
pinging on remote control heads, you should turn them off. Down Imaging and Side Imaging beams can operate at the same time.
You do not need to turn them off.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Sonar tab.
2. Select Connected Transducer.
3. Confirm the transducer connected to the control head is selected.
4. If there are additional control heads on your boat with a 2D transducer, confirm that they are not pinging while you are
mapping. There should be only one 2D transducer pinging on your boat during the recording process.
193
AutoChart Live
Confirm Digital Depth and GPS Fix
1. Display a Chart View on-screen.
2. Confirm Digital Depth: Confirm the depth digital readout is displayed.
It may take a moment for depth to be displayed.
3. Confirm GPS Fix: Confirm the speed digital readout is displayed.
NOTE: Digital readouts can be displayed as an overlay, or they can be displayed in data boxes (see Views: Display Digital
Readouts).
Confirming the Digital Depth Source
Confirming the Digital Depth Source
digital depth missing
digital depth detected
Adjust the Water Level Offset
When you start your mapping for the day, it is important to note if the water level is higher or lower than usual. For example, if you
know the lake is down 3 feet, set the Water Level Offset to -3.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the HB Chart tab.
2. Select Water Level Offset.
3. Use the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
If the water level is higher than normal, set a positive amount.
If the water level is lower than normal, set a negative amount.
If the water level has not changed (normal), turn off Water Level Offset.
AutoChart Live
194
Display the Current Track (optional)
It is helpful to display the current track so you can see where the boat has already traveled while you’re recording the map.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select Current Track. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Appearance. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Select Visibility. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor key to select Visible.
5. Save: Select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Start a Sonar Recording for AutoChart PC (optional)
If you are planning to use AutoChart PC, start a sonar recording before you start recording your custom map.
1. Install a microSD or SD card into the control head card slot.
See HELIX Control Head for compatibility details.
2. Press and hold the VIEW key.
3. Select System > Snapshot and Recording View.
4. Press the MENU key.
5. Select Start Recording. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
File Name: A waypoint will also be created at the boat location, and the recording shares the same file name as the waypoint
(.SON).
Use Different Views: To use different views on the control head and continue recording, press the EXIT key.
Not Available: Taking screen snapshots and playback mode are not available during recording.
NOTE: For more information, see Manage Screen Snapshots and Recordings. Also, visit our Web site at humminbird.com to
purchase AutoChart PC and download the manual.
195
AutoChart Live
2. RECORD YOUR CUSTOM MAP
1. Preparation: Before you start mapping for the day, confirm that the control head is set up as shown in the section Prepare
the Control Head for Mapping.
2. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
3. Select AutoChart Live. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Select Record.
5. Select On.
Display: Select AutoChart Live. Select Visible.
Zoom In: Press the +ZOOM key to see the depth data on the Chart View.
6. Navigate your boat in a zig-zag pattern, first in one direction and then in the other. For optimal performance, maintain a
consistent speed between 0 and 8 mph. See Plan your Map for details.
Starting an AutoChart Live Recording
turn on
Record
select Visible
to display the
depth map on
the Chart
View
heading
line
(green
line)
current
track
(red line)
depth map in
progress
AutoChart Live
196
depth scale
(AC Live Color Bar)
3. STOP RECORDING
Use the instructions in this section to stop recording. Your map is automatically saved to the control head (internal) or to the
ZeroLine Map Card if it is installed.
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select AutoChart Live. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Record.
4. Select Off.
If you do not have a ZeroLine Map Card installed, and the control head storage (8 hours) is reached, the control head
will provide a dialog box to Confirm or Clear Data. To save your map and turn off recording, select Confirm. To erase
your map and start over, select Clear Data.
CORRECT DATA
If you see an irregularity in the data (such as lost depth), it can be deleted. Recording must be turned off while you correct the data.
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select AutoChart Live. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select Show Raw Data. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Press the +ZOOM key to see individual data points.
5. Move the cursor over a data point.
6. From the AutoChart Live menu, select Delete. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Selecting a Data Point
cursor selecting
a data point
197
AutoChart Live
OPEN THE AUTOCHART LIVE MENU
You will use the AutoChart Live menu for all settings. Some of the menu options in this section may be displayed in other parts of
the menu system so that you can access them quickly. No matter where you make the change, the control head will update the
setting across the system.
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select AutoChart Live. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
DISPLAY THE AUTOCHART LIVE MAP
You can make changes to the AutoChart Live map during recording or after you’ve saved your map. You can also view bottom
hardness or vegetation data, and you can customize how the data is displayed.
Show/Hide the AutoChart Live Map
The custom map can be displayed or hidden while you are recording or after the map is saved. You can also adjust the transparency.
Show the AutoChart Live Map
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select AutoChart Live.
2. Select Visible.
Chart View with AutoChart Live Map Displayed
AC Live Color Bar set
to AutoChart Live
Hide the AutoChart Live Map
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select AutoChart Live.
2. Select Hidden.
AutoChart Live
198
Adjust the Transparency
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select AC Live Transparency.
2. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Display the AC Live Color Bar
The AC Live Color bar allows you to display the palette icon for AutoChart Live or Bottom Type. See the illustrations Chart View with
AutoChart Live Map Displayed and Chart/Chart Combo View.
You can use this icon to see the selected palette and, from left to right, the AutoChart Live depth range (low to high), Bottom
Hardness range (soft to hard), or Vegetation range (soft to hard).
Show/Hide the AC Live Color Bar
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select AC Live Color Bar.
2. Select a display bar.
Display AutoChart Live and Bottom Layer in Chart/Chart Combo View
You can also use the Chart/Chart Combo View to display AutoChart Live and Bottom Layer data at the same time. Use the X-Press
Menu to make adjustments to each pane. See Views: Combo Views for more information.
Display the Chart/Chart Combo View
1. Press and hold the VIEW key.
2. Select Chart > Chart/Chart Combo View.
Chart/Chart Combo View (Map Source: Humminbird LakeMaster)
indicates the selected
pane (Active Pane)
AutoChart Live Menu
AutoChart Live Menu
AutoChart Live Map
Visible
AutoChart Live Visible
with Vegetation Bottom
Layer Displayed
199
AutoChart Live
CUSTOMIZE THE AUTOCHART LIVE MAP DISPLAY SETTINGS
Use the AutoChart Live Options menu to adjust the depth range, contour interval, and map position. You can also change the color
palette and shading.
Open the AutoChart Live Options Menu
You will use the AutoChart Live Options menu for all display settings.
1. Chart X-Press Menu: With a Chart View displayed on-screen, press the MENU key once.
2. Select AutoChart Live. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Select AC Live Options. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
Adjust the Depth Range
You can adjust the range of data shown on the chart by changing the minimum range and maximum range on the display. The
range you select affects how the depth colors are displayed. For related color or shading options, see Change the Display Colors.
1. From the AutoChart Live Options menu, select Min Range.
2. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
3. Select Max Range.
4. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Adjusting the AutoChart Live Map Depth Range
low range
high range
depth scale
(AC Live Color Bar)
NOTE: Use the AC Live Color Bar icon see the selected palette and, from left to right, the AutoChart Live depth range (low to high),
Bottom Hardness range (soft to hard), or Vegetation range (soft to hard).
AutoChart Live
200
Change the Display Colors
Use the following instructions to change the color palette used to display the AutoChart Live map.
Changing the AutoChart Live Map Display Colors (Map Source: Humminbird LakeMaster)
color
palette
highlight
color
shallow color
depth scale
(AC Live Color Bar)
NOTE: Use the AC Live Color Bar icon see the selected palette and, from left to right, the AutoChart Live depth range (low to
high), Bottom Hardness range (soft to hard), or Vegetation range (soft to hard).
201
AutoChart Live
Show/Hide Depth Colors
Use the following instructions to show or hide the depth colors. If you hide the depth colors, the contours will be shown on the
display.
1. From the AutoChart Live Options menu, select Depth Colors.
2. Select a On (visible) or Off (hidden).
Change the Color Palette
The Color Palette menu changes the colors used to display the AutoChart Live map. The color range is shown in the AC Live Color
bar and is affected by the Min Range and Max Range settings. See Adjust the Depth Range for more information.
1. From the AutoChart Live Options menu, select Color Palette.
2. Select a palette.
Change the Highlight Color
If you’ve set the Depth Highlight and Depth Highlight Range in the HB Chart tab, and it is not easy to see with the AutoChart Live
color palette you’ve selected , you can change the Highlight Color. See Display Humminbird LakeMaster Contour Lines and Depth
Ranges for more information.
1. From the AutoChart Live Options menu, select Highlight Color.
2. Select a color.
Change the Shallow Color
If you’ve set the Shallow Water Highlight in the HB Chart tab, and it is not easy to see with the AutoChart Live color palette you’ve
selected, you can change the Shallow Color. See Display Humminbird LakeMaster Contour Lines and Depth Ranges for more
information.
1. From the AutoChart Live Options menu, select Shallow Color.
2. Select a color.
AutoChart Live
202
Display Contour Lines and Adjust the Contour Interval
You can display or hide the contour lines on the map, and you can adjust the distance between each contour line. Contour Interval
is also affected by the Water Level Offset setting.
Display the Contour Lines and Adjust the Contour Interval
1. From the AutoChart Live Options menu, select Contour Lines.
2. Select Visible.
3. Select Contour Intervals.
4. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Change the Contour Lines Color
1. From the AutoChart Live Options menu, select Contour Colors.
2. Select a color.
Changing the AutoChart Live Map Display Colors (Map Source: Humminbird LakeMaster)
contour
intervals
contour line
depth label
(depth of contour)
203
AutoChart Live
Add Settings with Chart Options
You can also add adjustments to your custom map using the HB Chart menu. For example, if Humminbird is set as the map source,
you can add Depth Colors, Shallow Water, etc. to your AutoChart Live map. See Display Humminbird LakeMaster Contour Lines and
Depth Ranges.
If Navionics is set as the map source, you can display Contours and Shading on your AutoChart Live map. See Customize the Chart
View for more information.
Adding Shallow Water Settings to the Map
(Map Source: Humminbird LakeMaster)
Change the Water Level Offset
When you start your mapping for the day, it is important to note if the water level is higher or lower than usual. See Prepare the
Control Head for Mapping for more information.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the HB Chart tab.
2. Select Water Level Offset.
3. Use the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
If the water level is higher than normal, set a positive amount.
If the water level is lower than normal, set a negative amount.
If the water level has not changed (normal), turn off Water Level Offset.
AutoChart Live
204
CUSTOMIZE THE BOTTOM HARDNESS DISPLAY SETTINGS
The Bottom Layer is displayed on top of the AutoChart Live map and can be displayed as bottom hardness or vegetation. Bottom
Hardness shows strong sonar returns resulting from compacted sediment, rocks, fallen trees, etc.
Show/Hide Bottom Hardness
Show Bottom Hardness
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select Bottom Layer.
2. Select Visible.
3. Select Bottom Type.
4. Select Bottom Hardness.
Displaying the Bottom Hardness Layer (Map Source: Humminbird LakeMaster)
bottom
hardness
layer
bottom
layer set
to Visible
AutoChart
Live Map
layer
bottom type
bottom
hardness layer
hardness scale
(AC Live Color Bar)
Hide Bottom Hardness
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select Bottom Layer.
2. Select Hidden.
205
AutoChart Live
Adjust the Gain Offset
Use Gain Offset to tune the bottom hardness display. For example, if you’re fishing a lake where most of the lake has a hard bottom,
reduce the gain so only the hardest bottom is displayed.
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select Hardness Options.
Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Gain Offset.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Adjust the Bottom Hardness Transparency
The bottom layer is displayed on top of the AutoChart Live map, and you can adjust the transparency to see different layers on the
view.
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select Hardness Transparency.
2. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
AutoChart Live
206
Adjust the Hardness Range
You can adjust the range of bottom hardness shown on the chart by changing the minimum range and maximum range on the
display. The range you select affects how the bottom hardness colors are displayed. The range is displayed in the AC Live Color Bar
with Bottom Hardness selected.
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select Hardness Options.
Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Min Hardness.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
4. Select Max Hardness.
5. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Adjusting the Bottom Hardness Range (Map Source: Humminbird LakeMaster)
low range
high range
bottom
hardness
layer
AutoChart
Live Map
layer
bottom
hardness layer
hardness scale
(AC Live Color Bar)
NOTE: Use the AC Live Color Bar icon see the selected palette and, from left to right, the AutoChart Live depth range (low to high),
Bottom Hardness range (soft to hard), or Vegetation range (soft to hard).
207
AutoChart Live
Change the Bottom Hardness Colors
Use the following instructions to change the color palette used to display Bottom Hardness.
Changing the Bottom Hardness Colors (Map Source: Humminbird LakeMaster)
bottom
hardness
layer
hardness
color
AutoChart
Live Map
layer
bottom
hardness layer
hardness scale
(AC Live Color Bar)
NOTE: Use the AC Live Color Bar icon see the selected palette and, from left to right, the AutoChart Live depth range (low to high),
Bottom Hardness range (soft to hard), or Vegetation range (soft to hard).
Change the Hardness Colors
The Hardness Color menu changes the colors used to display bottom hardness on the view. The color range is shown in the AC Live
Color bar and is affected by the Min Hardness and Max Hardness settings. See Adjust the Hardness Range for more information.
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select Hardness Options.
Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Hardness Color.
3. Select a palette.
AutoChart Live
208
CUSTOMIZE THE VEGETATION DISPLAY SETTINGS
The Bottom Layer is displayed on top of the AutoChart Live map and can be displayed as bottom hardness or vegetation. Vegetation
shows the sonar returns interpreted as vegetation on the Chart View.
Show/Hide Vegetation
Show Vegetation
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select Bottom Layer.
2. Select Visible.
3. Select Bottom Type.
4. Select Vegetation.
Displaying the Vegetation Layer (Map Source: Humminbird LakeMaster)
vegetation
layer
bottom
layer set
to Visible
AutoChart
Live Map
layer
bottom type
vegetation scale
(AC Live Color Bar)
Hide Vegetation
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select Bottom Layer.
2. Select Hidden.
209
AutoChart Live
Adjust the Gain Offset
Use Gain Offset to tune the vegetation display. Vegetation will vary with the lake, season, or environment you are fishing, and you
should adjust the Gain Offset as needed.
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select Vegetation Options.
Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Gain Offset.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Adjust the Vegetation Transparency
The bottom layer is displayed on top of the AutoChart Live map, and you can adjust the transparency to see different layers on the
view.
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select Vegetation Transparency.
2. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
AutoChart Live
210
Adjust the Vegetation Range
You can adjust the range of vegetation shown on the chart by changing the minimum range and maximum range on the display.
The range you select affects how the vegetation colors are displayed.
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select Vegetation Options.
Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Min Vegetation.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
4. Select Max Vegetation.
5. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the setting.
Adjusting the Vegetation Range (Map Source: Humminbird LakeMaster)
low range
high range
vegetation
layer
AutoChart
Live Map
layer
vegetation scale
(AC Live Color Bar)
NOTE: Use the AC Live Color Bar icon see the selected palette and, from left to right, the AutoChart Live depth range (low to high),
Bottom Hardness range (soft to hard), or Vegetation range (soft to hard).
211
AutoChart Live
Change the Vegetation Colors
Use the following instructions to change the color palette used to display vegetation.
Changing the Vegetation Colors (Map Source: Humminbird LakeMaster)
vegetation
layer
vegetation
color
AutoChart
Live Map
layer
vegetation scale
(AC Live Color Bar)
NOTE: Use the AC Live Color Bar icon see the selected palette and, from left to right, the AutoChart Live depth range (low to high),
Bottom Hardness range (soft to hard), or Vegetation range (soft to hard).
Change the Vegetation Colors
The Vegetation Color menu changes the colors used to display vegetation on the view. The color range is shown in the AC Live Color
bar and is affected by the Min Vegetation and Max Vegetation settings. See Adjust the Vegetation Range for more information.
1. From the AutoChart Live menu, select Vegetation Options.
Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
2. Select Vegetation Color.
3. Select a palette.
AutoChart Live
212
MANAGE YOUR CONTROL HEAD
Select an Installed GPS Receiver
The GPS Receiver Override menu is available when more than one GPS receiver is installed and detected by the control head. If GPS
Receiver Override is set to Auto, the control head will select a GPS receiver automatically. To manually select a GPS receiver, follow
the instructions in this section.
NOTE: If the control head is connected to an Ethernet network, this menu is not available. In this situation, use the Network
Source Setup dialog box to select a GPS source. For more information, download the Ethernet manual from our Web site at
humminbird.com.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Nav tab.
2. Select GPS Receiver Override.
3. Select a GPS installation location.
Set the GPS Output Frequency
GPS Output controls the frequency at which data from the GPS Receiver is sent to the control head. Select 10 Hz to receive the most
GPS updates on the display.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select GPS Output.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a setting.
Turn on/off GPS GLONASS
Use the following instructions to use GLONASS.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select GPS GLONASS.
3. Select On or Off.
213
Manage your Control Head
Turn on/off NMEA 0183 Output
NMEA Output should be turned on if you connect the NMEA Output wires of an accessory GPS receiver (external) or heading sensor
cable to another NMEA-compatible device, such as an autopilot. See the accessory guide for details. Accessory guides can be
downloaded from our Web site at humminbird.com.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select NMEA 0183 Output.
3. Select On or Off.
If NMEA 0183 Output is turned on, the following sentences are output:
Message
Description
APB
Heading/Track Controller (Autopilot) Sentence “B” (navigation only)
BWR
Bearing & Distance to Waypoint - Rhumb Line (navigation only)
DPT
Depth
GGA
Global Positioning System Fix Data
GLL
Geographical Position - Latitude/Longitude
MTW
Water Temperature
RMB
Recommended Minimum Navigation Info (navigation only)
RMC
Recommended Minimum Specification GNSS Data
VTG
Track Made Good & Ground Speed
ZDA
Time & Date
Configure the NMEA Talker ID
Use the following instructions to change the NMEA 0183 Talker ID to match the NMEA 0183 installed accessory.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select Configure NMEA Talker ID.
3. Select IN-Integrated Navigation (Default) or GP-Global Positioning System.
Manage your Control Head
214
Start the Timer
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Alarms tab.
2. Select Timer Setup. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
3. Use the Cursor Control key to set the hours, minutes, and seconds.
4. To start the Timer immediately, select Start. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
To save your settings and start the Timer at a later time, select Save. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
NOTE: The Timer can be displayed as a digital readout. See Views: Display Digital Readouts.
Change the Display Language
The available languages are determined by your Humminbird model.
WARNING! Do NOT enable Asian Mode if you do not require Asian languages. Before you select Asian Mode, contact Customer
Service for important information.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select Language.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a language.
Change Digital Readout Formats
Use the following instructions to customize the format for the digital readouts displayed on the control head. See Views: Display
Digital Readouts for more information.
Change the Digits Format
If you have Digital Readouts set to Boxes, you can change how the numbers are displayed.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select Digits Format.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a format.
Change Units of Measurement
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select Units - Depth, Units - Distance, Units - Speed, etc., and select each unit setting as you prefer.
3. Close: Press the EXIT key.
NOTE: The Units - Temp menu is only available in an international model.
215
Manage your Control Head
Apply an Offset to a Digital Readout
Use the following instructions to adjust the digital readout by the offset amount entered.
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select one of the following menus. Use the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to adjust the offset.
Depth Offset
Adjusts the depth digital readout by the amount entered. To read the depth from the waterline,
enter a positive vertical measurement. To read the depth from the keel, enter a negative amount.
Temp. Offset
Adjusts the temperature digital readout by the amount entered.
Speed Calibration
Adjusts the speed digital readout by the amount entered. Speed paddlewheel accessory
required.
Change the Latitude/Longitude Format
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select Position Format.
3. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a format.
Change the Time and Date Format
1. Main Menu (Advanced User Mode): Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select one of the following menus. Press the RIGHT or LEFT Cursor keys to select a format.
Local Time Zone
Select your time zone.
Daylight Saving
Time
To add one hour to the time displayed in the local time zone, select On.
Time Format
Select a time format. International models only.
Date Format
Select a date format. International models only.
Turn off Demonstration Mode
The control head will start demonstration mode if a start up mode is not selected when the unit is first turned on (see Getting
Started). If the screen is displaying tips, menus, and views automatically, it is in Demonstration mode. Use the following instructions
to turn off Demonstration mode.
NOTE: Menu settings cannot be saved in Demonstration mode.
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select Demonstration.
3. Select Off.
Manage your Control Head
216
Adjust the Backlight
1. Press the POWER key.
2. Select Light.
3. Adjust the Backlight setting from Dim to 10 (brightest).
Start Standby Mode
To conserve power while the control head is not in-use, start Standby mode.
1. Press the POWER key.
2. Select Standby.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Turn off: Press the POWER key.
Restore System Defaults
Use the following instructions to reset ALL menu settings to the factory defaults.
CAUTION! Use this menu with caution!
1. Main Menu: Press the MENU key twice. Select the Setup tab.
2. Select Restore Defaults.
3. Press the RIGHT Cursor key.
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to confirm the reset.
217
Manage your Control Head
UPDATE SOFTWARE
Set up an online account at humminbird.com so that you will receive the latest Humminbird news and software updates for your
Humminbird model. You can also download HumminbirdPC from your account, which allows you to manage your waypoints, routes,
and tracks on your personal computer.
If your control head model does not include a microSD or SD card slot, you can use HumminbirdPC to update the control head
software. Visit humminbird.com for details.
NOTE: It is important to back up your control head’s data files (waypoints, routes, tracks, groups, recordings, etc.) periodically.
Data files should also be saved to your PC before restoring the unit’s defaults or updating the software. See Manage your
Navigation Data: Import/Export Navigation Data and Manage Screen Snapshots and Recordings for more information. Also,
contact Humminbird Customer Service with any questions.
Required Equipment: Personal computer with Internet access, and a formatted microSD or SD card. See HELIX Control Head for
compatibility details.
Register your Humminbird Products
Set up an online account and register your Humminbird equipment so that you will receive the latest Humminbird news, including
accessory compatibility and software update information.
1. Go to our Web site at humminbird.com. Select Support > Register your Product.
If you already have a humminbird.com account, select My Humminbird.
2. Follow the on-screen prompts to create a new account and register your products.
Update the Control Head Software
Use the following instructions to download software updates from your account on humminbird.com.
1. Install a formatted microSD or SD card into the slot on your PC.
2. Download: Select the My Equipment page. The available software updates are listed as Downloads under each registered
product.
• Under Downloads, click the file name.
• Read the instructions in the dialog box and select Download.
• Follow the on-screen prompts to save the software file to the microSD or SD card.
3. Install the microSD or SD card with the updated software file into the control head card slot.
4. Power On: The control head will recognize the new software and run through a series of prompts to confirm the software
installation.
Update Software
218
MAINTENANCE
Your control head is designed to provide years of trouble-free use with very little maintenance. Use the following procedures to
ensure your Humminbird continues to deliver top performance.
Control Head Maintenance
It is important to consider the following precautions when using your Humminbird control head:
• Chemicals, such as those found in bug spray and sunscreen, may cause permanent damage to the control head screen. Such
damage is not covered by the warranty.
• NEVER leave the control head in a closed car or trunk. The high temperatures generated in hot weather can damage the
electronics.
• When the control head is not in use, cover the unit with the control head cover.
• Repairs should be performed only by an authorized technician.
Use the following information to keep the control head and screen clean.
• Screen: To clean the control head screen, use a mild soap (such as a non-abrasive liquid hand soap) and warm water. Wipe
the screen dry with a soft cloth. Be careful to avoid scratching the screen. If water spots remain, use a solution of water and
vinegar.
WARNING! Do not use a chemical glass cleaner on the screen. Chemicals in the solution may cause cracking in the lens of the unit.
NOTE: Do not wipe the screen while dirt or grease is on the screen.
• Control Head: If the control head comes into contact with salt spray, wipe the affected surfaces with a cloth dampened with
fresh water.
Transducer Maintenance
Use the following information to maintain the transducer operation.
• If your boat remains in the water for long periods of time, algae and other marine growth can reduce the effectiveness of the
transducer. Periodically clean the face of the transducer with a mild, marine-safe and plastic-safe soap or solution.
NOTE: To clean the transducer, you may need to pivot the transducer up in the bracket.
• If your boat remains out of the water for a long period of time, it may take some time to wet the transducer when it is returned
to the water. Small air bubbles can climb to the surface of the transducer and interfere with proper operation. These bubbles
dissipate with time, or you can wipe the face of the transducer with your fingers after the transducer is in the water.
219
Maintenance
TROUBLESHOOTING
Before contacting Humminbird Customer Service, please read the following section. Taking the time to review these troubleshooting
guidelines may allow you to solve a performance problem yourself, and therefore avoid sending your unit back for repair.
Control Head Doesn’t Power Up
If your control head doesn’t power up, use the installation guide to confirm the following:
• the power cable is properly connected to the control head
• the power cable is wired correctly, with red to positive battery terminal and black to negative terminal or ground
• the fuse is operational
• the battery voltage of the power connector is at least 12.2 Volts
Correct any known problems, including removing corrosion from the battery terminals or wiring, or replacing the battery if necessary.
Also, visit humminbird.com to download our Power Troubleshooting Guide.
Control Head Doesn’t Detect the Connected Transducer
A connected and functioning transducer will automatically be detected by the control head. The control head will default to the
transducer that was included with your unit and automatically select sonar settings based on the transducer’s capabilities. If, when
you power up the control head, it does not automatically select sonar settings or display sonar data, even though a transducer is
already connected, this means that the control head is not detecting the transducer. Perform the following troubleshooting tasks:
• Using the transducer installation guide, check to make sure that the transducer cable is securely connected to the control head.
Reconnect if necessary, and power up the unit again to see if this fixes the problem.
• Replace the non-functioning transducer with a known good transducer if available and power up the control head again.
• Check the transducer cable. Replace the transducer if the cable is damaged or corroded.
Control Head Doesn’t Detect a Connected Accessory
A connected and functioning accessory will automatically be detected by the control head. If you connected an accessory to the
control head and the accessory is not detected by the control head, try the following:
• Check to make sure that the accessory cable is securely connected to the control head. Reconnect the cable, if necessary.
• Confirm the accessory is connected to a stable and reliable power source.
• Entire System Restart: Power off all control heads and connected equipment. Wait 10 seconds, and then power on all equipment.
Troubleshooting
220
Display Problems
There are several main conditions or sources of possible interference that may cause problems with the quality of the information
displayed on the control head. Look in the following table for some symptoms of display problems and possible solutions:
Display Problems
Possible Solutions
The control head loses power at high
speeds.
If the power output of your boat’s engine is unregulated, the control head may be
protecting itself using its over-voltage protection feature. Make sure the input voltage
does not exceed 20 Volts.
When the boat moves at higher speeds,
the bottom disappears or suddenly
weakens, or the display contains gaps.
There are no fish detected, even when
you know they are in the water under the
boat, or sonar readings seem weak or
faulty.
The transducer position may need to be adjusted. A mix of air and water flowing around
the transducer (cavitation) may be interfering with the interpretation of sonar data.
See the transducer installation guide for instructions to adjust the transducer position.
Electrical noise from the boat’s engine may be interfering with sonar reception. See
Finding the Cause of Noise for more information.
Sonar readings may be affected if the transducer is not positioned correctly (such as
mounted at an angle, not straight down), or there is some kind of mechanical
interference, either because it is mounted inside a hull that is too thick for proper sonar
transmission, the bond between the transducer and the hull is not airtight, or because
the transducer is dirty. See the transducer installation guide to adjust the transducer
position, and make sure the transducer is clean.
Low battery voltage may be affecting the power of signal transmission.
Electrical noise from the boat’s engine may be interfering with sonar reception. See
Finding the Cause of Noise for more information.
Finding the Cause of Noise
Electrical noise usually affects the display with many black dots at high speeds, and high sensitivity readings. See the table below
for possible sources that can cause noise or interference.
Possible Source of Noise
Isolation
Other electronic devices
Turn off any nearby electronic devices to see if the problem goes away, then turn them
on one at a time to see if the noise re-appears.
The boat’s engine
To determine whether the boat’s engine is the source of the noise, increase the RPMs
while the boat is in neutral and stationary to see if the noise increases proportionately.
If the noise appears when you rev the engine, the problem could be the spark plugs,
alternator, or tachometer wiring. Replace the spark plugs with resistor plugs, install an
alternator filter, or route the control head power and transducer cables away from the
engine wiring.
Cavitation from the boat’s propeller
Turbulence created by the propeller can cause noise. Confirm the transducer has been
properly installed according to its specific mounting requirements (see the transducer
installation guide for details). Also, make sure that the water flows smoothly over the
face of the transducer at all times.
221
Troubleshooting
SPECIFICATIONS
HELIX 5 SONAR G2
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 inches (127 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
DualBeam PLUS Transducer
XNT 9 20 T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 kHz and 83 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60°@-10 dB in 83 kHz, 20°@-10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
222
HELIX 5 CHIRP GPS G2
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 inches (127 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP DualBeam PLUS Transducer
XNT 9 20 T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 kHz and 83 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60°@-10 dB in 83 kHz, 20°@-10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
223
Specifications
HELIX 5 DI G2
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 inches (127 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
Down Imaging Transducer
XNT 9 DI T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 455 kHz, 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 200 kHz and 455 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 350 ft (107 m)
DualBeam PLUS: 600 ft (183 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Down Imaging: 75º @ -10 dB in 455 kHz, 45º @ -10 dB in 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 28° @ -10 dB in 200 kHz, 16° @ -10 dB in 455 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
224
HELIX 5 CHIRP DI GPS G2
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 inches (127 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP Down Imaging Transducer
XNT 9 DI T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 455 kHz, 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 200 kHz and 455 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 350 ft (107 m)
DualBeam PLUS: 600 ft (183 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Down Imaging: 75º @ -10 dB in 455 kHz, 45º @ -10 dB in 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 28° @ -10 dB in 200 kHz, 16° @ -10 dB in 455 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
225
Specifications
HELIX 5 CHIRP SI GPS G2
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 inches (127 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP Side Imaging Transducer
XNT 9 SI 180 T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Imaging: 455 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 200 kHz and 83 kHz
Side Imaging Range Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ft (61 m) Side to Side
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DualBeam PLUS: 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Imaging: (2) 86º @ -10 dB in 455 kHz (180º Total Coverage)
DualBeam PLUS: 60° @ -10 dB in 83 kHz, 20° @ -10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
226
HELIX 5 GPS G2
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 inches (127 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
227
Specifications
HELIX 5 Control Head Measurements
HELIX 5 Gimbal Mount
7.55 in (191.77 mm)
VIEW
4.28 in
(108.71 mm)
MENU
MARK
EXIT
GOTO
2.90 in (73.66 mm)
3.30 in (83.82 mm)
Specifications
228
4.64 in
(117.86 mm)
HELIX 5 In-Dash Mount
7.55 in (191.77 mm)
VIEW
4.28 in
(108.71 mm)
MENU
MARK
EXIT
GOTO
MOB
2.90 in (73.66 mm)
2.17 in (55.12 mm)
229
Specifications
HELIX 7 SONAR G2
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 inches (178 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
DualBeam PLUS Transducer
XNT 9 20 T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 kHz and 83 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60°@-10 dB in 83 kHz, 20°@-10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
230
HELIX 7 CHIRP GPS G2
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 inches (178 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP DualBeam PLUS Transducer
XNT 9 20 T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 kHz and 83 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60°@-10 dB in 83 kHz, 20°@-10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
231
Specifications
HELIX 7 CHIRP GPS G2N
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 inches (178 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183, Ethernet
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP DualBeam PLUS Transducer
XNT 9 20 T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 kHz and 83 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60°@-10 dB in 83 kHz, 20°@-10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
232
HELIX 7 CHIRP DI G2, HELIX 7 CHIRP DI GPS G2
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 inches (178 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP Down Imaging Transducer
XNT 9 DI T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 455 kHz, 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 200 kHz and 455 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 350 ft (107 m)
DualBeam PLUS: 600 ft (183 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Down Imaging: 75º @ -10 dB in 455 kHz, 45º @ -10 dB in 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 28° @ -10 dB in 200 kHz, 16° @ -10 dB in 455 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
233
Specifications
HELIX 7 CHIRP DI GPS G2N
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 inches (178 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183, Ethernet
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP Down Imaging Transducer
XNT 9 DI T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 455 kHz, 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 200 kHz and 455 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 350 ft (107 m)
DualBeam PLUS: 600 ft (183 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Down Imaging: 75º @ -10 dB in 455 kHz, 45º @ -10 dB in 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 28° @ -10 dB in 200 kHz, 16° @ -10 dB in 455 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
234
HELIX 7 CHIRP SI GPS G2
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 inches (178 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP Side Imaging Transducer
XNT 9 SI 180 T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Imaging: 455 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 200 kHz and 83 kHz
Side Imaging Range Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ft (61 m) Side to Side
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DualBeam PLUS: 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Imaging: (2) 86º @ -10 dB in 455 kHz (180º Total Coverage)
DualBeam PLUS: 60° @ -10 dB in 83 kHz, 20° @ -10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
235
Specifications
HELIX 7 CHIRP SI GPS G2N
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 inches (178 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183, Ethernet
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP Side Imaging Transducer
XNT 9 SI 180 T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Imaging: 455 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 200 kHz and 83 kHz
Side Imaging Range Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ft (61 m) Side to Side
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DualBeam PLUS: 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Imaging: (2) 86º @ -10 dB in 455 kHz (180º Total Coverage)
DualBeam PLUS: 60° @ -10 dB in 83 kHz, 20° @ -10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
236
HELIX 7 GPS G2
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 inches (178 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 mA
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
237
Specifications
HELIX 7 Control Head Measurements
HELIX 7 Gimbal Mount
10.54 in (267.72 mm)
5.44 in
(138.18 mm)
5.80 in
(147.32 mm)
2.97 in (75.44 mm)
3.60 in (91.44 mm)
Specifications
238
HELIX 7 In-Dash Mount
10.54 in (267.72 mm)
5.44 in
(138.18 mm)
2.97 in (75.44 mm)
2.17 in (55.12 mm)
239
Specifications
HELIX 9 CHIRP GPS G2N
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 inches (228.6 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183, Ethernet
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 A
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP DualBeam PLUS Transducer
XNT 9 20 T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 kHz and 83 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60°@-10 dB in 83 kHz, 20°@-10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
240
HELIX 9 CHIRP DI GPS G2N
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 inches (228.6 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183, Ethernet
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 A
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP Down Imaging Transducer
XNT 9 DI T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 455 kHz, 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 200 kHz and 455 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 350 ft (107 m)
DualBeam PLUS: 600 ft (183 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 75º @ -10 dB in 455 kHz, 45º @ -10 dB in 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 28° @ -10 dB in 200 kHz, 16° @ -10 dB in 455 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
241
Specifications
HELIX 9 CHIRP SI GPS G2N (CHIRP MEGA SI)
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 inches (228.6 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WVGA 480V x 800H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183, Ethernet
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 A
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP MEGA Side Imaging Transducer
XM 9 20 MSI T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Side Imaging
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 kHz, 800 kHz, MEGA
Range Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 kHz: 800 ft (244 m) Side to Side
800 kHz: 250 ft (76 m) Side to Side
MEGA: 250 ft (76 m) Side to Side
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) 86º @ -10 dB in 455 kHz (180º Total Coverage)
(2) 55º @ -10 dB in 800 kHz (130º Total Coverage)
MEGA: (2) 86º @ -10 dB in MEGA kHz (180º Total Coverage)
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
Down Imaging
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 kHz, 800 kHz, MEGA
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 kHz: 400 ft (122 m)
800 kHz: 125 ft (38 m)
MEGA: 125 ft (38 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75° @ -10 dB in 455 kHz
45° @ -10 dB in 800 kHz
MEGA: 75° @ -10 dB in MEGA kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
Specifications
242
DualBeam PLUS
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 kHz and 83 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60° @ -10 dB in 83 kHz,
20° @ -10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
243
Specifications
HELIX 9 Control Head Measurements
HELIX 9 Gimbal Mount
13.44 (341.38 mm)
||
7.114
(180.7 mm)
||
7.5
(191 mm)
||
4.203 (106.76 mm)
||
Specifications
244
HELIX 9 In-Dash Mount
13.44 (341.38 mm)
||
7.114
(180.7 mm)
||
3.991 (101.37 mm)
||
1.324
(33.63 mm)
||
3.685 (93.59 mm)
||
245
Specifications
HELIX 10 CHIRP GPS G2N
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 inches (256.5 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WSVGA 600V x 1024H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183, Ethernet
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 A
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP DualBeam PLUS Transducer
XNT 9 20 T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 kHz and 83 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60°@-10 dB in 83 kHz, 20°@-10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
246
HELIX 10 CHIRP DI GPS G2N
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 inches (256.5 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WSVGA 600V x 1024H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183, Ethernet
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 A
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP Down Imaging Transducer
XNT 9 DI T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 455 kHz, 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 200 kHz and 455 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 350 ft (107 m)
DualBeam PLUS: 600 ft (183 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Down Imaging: 75º @ -10 dB in 455 kHz, 45º @ -10 dB in 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 28° @ -10 dB in 200 kHz, 16° @ -10 dB in 455 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
247
Specifications
HELIX 10 CHIRP SI GPS G2N (CHIRP MEGA SI)
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 inches (256.5 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WSVGA 600V x 1024H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183, Ethernet
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 A
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP MEGA Side Imaging Transducer
XM 9 20 MSI T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Side Imaging
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 kHz, 800 kHz, MEGA
Range Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 kHz: 800 ft (244 m) Side to Side
800 kHz: 250 ft (76 m) Side to Side
MEGA: 250 ft (76 m) Side to Side
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) 86º @ -10 dB in 455 kHz (180º Total Coverage)
(2) 55º @ -10 dB in 800 kHz (130º Total Coverage)
MEGA: (2) 86º @ -10 dB in MEGA kHz (180º Total Coverage)
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
Down Imaging
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 kHz, 800 kHz, MEGA
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 kHz: 400 ft (122 m)
800 kHz: 125 ft (38 m)
MEGA: 125 ft (38 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75° @ -10 dB in 455 kHz
45° @ -10 dB in 800 kHz
MEGA: 75° @ -10 dB in MEGA kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
Specifications
248
DualBeam PLUS
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 kHz and 83 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60° @ -10 dB in 83 kHz,
20° @ -10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
249
Specifications
HELIX 10 Control Head Measurements
HELIX 10 Gimbal Mount
13.44 (341.38 mm)
||
7.114
(180.7 mm)
||
7.5
(191 mm)
||
4.203 (106.76 mm)
||
Specifications
250
HELIX 10 In-Dash Mount
13.44 (341.38 mm)
||
7.114
(180.7 mm)
||
3.991 (101.37 mm)
||
1.324
(33.63 mm)
||
3.685 (93.59 mm)
||
251
Specifications
HELIX 12 CHIRP GPS G2N
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 inches (307.3 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WXGA 800V x 1280H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183, Ethernet
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 A
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP DualBeam PLUS Transducer
XNT 9 20 T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 kHz, 200 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60°@-10 dB in 83 kHz, 20°@-10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
252
HELIX 12 CHIRP DI GPS G2N
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 inches (307.3 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WXGA 800V x 1280H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183, Ethernet
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0 A
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP Down Imaging Transducer
XNT 9 DI T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 455 kHz, 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 200 kHz, 455 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 350 ft (107 m)
DualBeam PLUS: 600 ft (183 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down Imaging: 75º @ -10 dB in 455 kHz, 45º @ -10 dB in 800 kHz
DualBeam PLUS: 28° @ -10 dB in 200 kHz, 16° @ -10 dB in 455 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
253
Specifications
HELIX 12 CHIRP SI GPS G2N (CHIRP MEGA SI)
Control Head
Display Size (diagonal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 inches (307.3 mm)
Pixel Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WXGA 800V x 1280H
Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFT Color
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMEA 0183, Ethernet
Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 20 VDC
Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0 A
IPX Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPX7 Waterproof/Submersible @ 1 m for 30 minutes
CHIRP MEGA Side Imaging Transducer
XM 9 20 MSI T (includes built-in temperature probe)
Side Imaging
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 kHz, 800 kHz, MEGA
Range Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 kHz: 800 ft (244 m) Side to Side
800 kHz: 250 ft (76 m) Side to Side
MEGA: 250 ft (76 m) Side to Side
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2) 86º @ -10 dB in 455 kHz (180º Total Coverage)
(2) 55º @ -10 dB in 800 kHz (130º Total Coverage)
MEGA: (2) 86º @ -10 dB in MEGA kHz (180º Total Coverage)
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
Down Imaging
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 kHz, 800 kHz, MEGA
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 kHz: 400 ft (122 m)
800 kHz: 125 ft (38 m)
MEGA: 125 ft (38 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75° @ -10 dB in 455 kHz
45° @ -10 dB in 800 kHz
MEGA: 75° @ -10 dB in MEGA kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
Specifications
254
DualBeam PLUS
Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 kHz and 83 kHz
Depth Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 ft (457 m)
Area of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60° @ -10 dB in 83 kHz,
20° @ -10 dB in 200 kHz
Power Output (MAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Watts (RMS), 4000 Watts (Peak to Peak)
NOTE: Humminbird verifies maximum stated depth in saltwater conditions, but actual depth performance may vary due to
transducer installation, water type, thermal layers, bottom composition, and slope.
NOTE: Product specifications and features are subject to change without notice.
255
Specifications
HELIX 12 Control Head Measurements
HELIX 12 Gimbal Mount
14.86 (377 mm)
||
8.52
(216 mm)
||
8.90
(228 mm)
||
4.11 (104 mm)
||
Specifications
256
HELIX 12 In-Dash Mount
14.86 (377 mm)
||
8.52
(216 mm)
||
3.90 (99 mm)
||
1.22
(31 mm)
||
3.69 (94 mm)
||
257
Specifications
Linux Operating System
NOTE: This product uses the Linux operating system. This portion of the software is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You may receive a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
To receive a free copy of the Linux software used in this system, please send a letter of request* with the following information:
Name (First & Last)
Phone Number
E-mail Address
Mailing Address
Humminbird serial number
(Your Humminbird unit must be registered at humminbird.com/support/productregistration.aspx.)
Shipping and Handling:
We can only accept requests that include a money order in the amount of $9.99 to cover shipping and handling. Please allow 4-6 weeks for
processing.
Send the letter of request* to the following address:
Software Request
Humminbird
678 Humminbird Lane
Eufaula, AL 36027
*NOTE: A copy of the Linux operating system is not required to upgrade your fishing system. The Humminbird application software and control
head include a separate service warranty. Please see humminbird.com and the separate warranty card included with your unit for details.
Specifications
258
CONTACT HUMMINBIRD
Contact Humminbird Customer Service in any of the following ways:
Web site:
humminbird.com
E-mail:
[email protected]
Telephone:
1-800-633-1468
Direct Shipping:
Humminbird
Service Department
678 Humminbird Lane
Eufaula, AL 36027 USA
Hours of Operation:
Monday - Friday
8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. (Central Standard Time)
Social Media Resources:
Facebook.com/HumminbirdElectronics
Twitter.com (@humminbirdfish)
YouTube.com/humminbirdtv
259
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement